Supporting:
• DaqLink
• DataNet
• MicroLite
• MicroLogPRO II
• PicoLite
User Guide
DataSuite Software
www.fourtec.com
FDA Title 21 CFR Part 11
Compliant
DataSuite User Guide
Supporting Fourtec Data Loggers:
DaqLink
DataNet
MicroLite II
MicroLogPRO II
PicoLite
Supporting DataSuite version 2.4.0.0
December 2013
© Fourtec - Fourier Technologies Ltd.
Contacting Fourtec technical support:
Email: support@fourtec.com
Web: www.fourtec.com
Telephone:
Worldwide: +972-3-901-4849
USA: 1-888-778-4927 (toll-free within USA only)
To download updated versions of the DataSuite User Guide and DataSuite
software/firmware visit:
www.fourtec.com
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2013 Fourtec – Fourier Technologies Ltd. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of this document in any manner without the prior written consent of
Fourtec – Fourier Technologies Ltd. is strictly forbidden.
What's New in this Edition

DataSuite software support for Chinese, French, Italian, Japanese, Russian, and
Spanish language interfaces. Go to Help > Languages to switch from the default
English interface to either of these languages. (German and Portuguese are
already available from v2.3.4.0).

Updated sections ‎4.7.4 and ‎7.3.4 regarding correct connection of PT-100 sensor
to DataNet and DaqLink data loggers.

Updated sections ‎10.4.1 and ‎13.5.1, providing explanation on recognizing when
MicroLite II and MicroLogPRO II battery needs replacement.

Updated section ‎10.1: Data Logger Layout, with polarity of two-wire Connector
MicroLite II mA, V and NTC external inputs.

Updated section ‎17.20: Calibration Overview, with more detailed explanation of
calibration procedure using the DataSuite software including recommended
calibration methodology.
Table of Contents
WHAT'S NEW IN THIS EDITION
3
CHAPTER 1:
INTRODUCTION
15
CHAPTER 2:
DATANET OVERVIEW
17
2.1.
DataNet Introduction
17
2.2.
What is ZigBee?
18
2.3. The ZigBee Concept
2.3.1.
ZigBee Mesh Network Operation
2.3.2.
Why is ZigBee Technology Key for Data Logging?
18
18
19
2.4. The DataNet System
2.4.1.
The Data Logger
2.4.2.
The Receiver/Repeater
2.4.3.
Hardware Accessories
2.4.4.
DataSuite Software
19
19
21
23
23
CHAPTER 3:
24
DATANET IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE
3.1.
DataNet Network Architecture
24
3.2.
Pre-setup Requirements
25
3.3.
Launching the Software
26
3.4.
Connecting the Receiver
26
3.5. Adding the Data Logger to the Network
3.5.1.
Charging DataNet Loggers
3.5.2.
Connecting DNL910 and DNL920 Loggers to the Network
3.5.3.
Connecting Mini DataNet Loggers and Mini Repeater to the Network
3.5.4.
Loading Map View Background
28
28
29
30
31
3.6.
32
Configuring the Logger
3.7. Viewing Data
3.7.1.
Online Data Views
3.7.2.
Logger Tooltip
3.7.3.
Sensor View
33
33
34
35
3.8. Optimizing the Network
3.8.1.
Signal Test Utility
3.8.2.
Overcoming RF Obstacles
3.8.3.
Showing the Network Path
3.8.4.
Adding Repeaters to the Network
3.8.5.
Using Loggers as Repeaters
35
36
36
37
38
38
3.9. Recommended Approach to Deploying DataNet Units
3.9.1.
DataNet Site Survey
39
40
CHAPTER 4:
42
DATANET HARDWARE OVERVIEW
4.1. Data Logger Front Panel Layout
4.1.1.
DNL910 and DNL920
4.1.2.
DNL804, DNL808 and DNL810
4.1.3.
DNL804, DNL808 and DNL810-BXT – External Battery Pack
42
42
42
43
4.2. Data Logger External Connections
4.2.1.
DNL910 and DNL920
4.2.2.
DNL804 and DNL804-BXT
4.2.3.
DNL808 and DNL808-BXT
4.2.4.
DNL810
43
43
44
45
45
4.3.
DNR800 Mini Repeater Front Panel Layout
45
4.4.
DNR900 Receiver/Repeater Front Panel Layout
46
4.5.
DNR800 Mini Repeater External Connections
46
4.6.
DNR900 Receiver/Repeater External Connections
47
4.7. Data Logger Sensor Overview
4.7.1.
Internal Sensor Types
4.7.2.
External Sensor Types
4.7.3.
Sensor Connection
4.7.4.
External PT-100 and NTC Sensor Connection
4.7.5.
Programming Limitations for DNL910 and DNL920
4.7.6.
External Alarm Output
4.7.7.
Polarity
4.7.8.
Frequency/Pulse Counter
4.7.9.
User Defined Sensors
4.7.10. Sensor Alarms
4.7.11. Sensor Calibration
47
47
48
49
49
49
50
51
51
52
52
52
4.8.
52
Unit Serial Number and Comment
4.9. Power Supply
4.9.1.
DNR900 in Receiver Mode
4.9.2.
DNR800 and DNR900 in Repeater Mode
4.9.3.
DNL910 and DNL920 Data Loggers
4.9.4.
Mini DataNet DNL8XX-BXT Data Loggers
4.9.5.
Mini DataNet DNL8XX Data Loggers
4.9.6.
Power Adapter
4.9.7.
Data Logger Battery Life
53
53
53
53
54
54
55
55
4.10. USB Communication Cable
56
4.11. DataNet Keypad Overview
4.11.1. DNL910, DNL920 and DNR900 Keypad
4.11.2. DNL8XX and DNL8XX-BXT Keypad
56
56
57
4.12. Operating the DNL910 and DNL920
4.12.1. Turning on the Unit
4.12.2. Display Shutdown
4.12.3. Joining a Network
4.12.4. Main Menu Options
4.12.5. Additional Logger Screens
57
57
58
58
60
63
4.13. Operating the Mini DataNet DNL8XX, DNL8XX-BXT and DNR800
4.13.1. Turning Mini DataNet Units Off
4.13.2. Turning Mini DataNet Units On and Joining a Network
4.13.3. Rescanning for Networks
65
65
65
66
4.13.4. Leave Network
4.13.5. Running Signal Test
4.13.6. Call Unit from Software
66
66
67
4.14. Operating the DNR900 in Receiver Mode
4.14.1. Turning on the Unit
4.14.2. Receiver Menus
4.14.3. Changing Receiver to Repeater
4.14.4. Additional Receiver Screens
67
67
67
68
69
4.15. Operating the DNR900 in Repeater Mode
4.15.1. Turning on the Unit
4.15.2. Display Shutdown
4.15.3. Joining a Network
4.15.4. Menu Options
4.15.5. Additional Repeater Screens
4.15.6. Working in Substitute Receiver Mode
69
69
69
69
71
74
75
4.16. Data Logger Memory Management
75
CHAPTER 5:
76
5.1.
DAQLINK OVERVIEW
DaqLink Introduction
76
5.2. The DaqLink System
5.2.1.
The Data Logger
5.2.2.
Hardware Accessories
77
77
78
CHAPTER 6:
79
DAQLINK IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE
6.1.
Pre-setup Requirements
79
6.2.
Launching the Software
79
6.3.
Connecting the Logger
80
6.4.
Charging DaqLink Loggers
81
6.5.
Loading Map View Background
81
6.6.
Configuring the Logger
81
6.7. Viewing Data
6.7.1.
Online Data Views
6.7.2.
Logger Tooltip
6.7.3.
Sensor View
83
83
84
84
6.8.
85
Downloading Data
CHAPTER 7:
DAQLINK HARDWARE OVERVIEW
86
7.1. Data Logger Front Panel Layout
7.1.1.
DBSA710 and DBSA720
86
86
7.2. Data Logger External Connections
7.2.1.
DBSA710 and DBSA720
86
86
7.3.
87
Data Logger Sensor Overview
7.3.1.
7.3.2.
7.3.3.
7.3.4.
7.3.5.
7.3.6.
7.3.7.
7.3.8.
7.3.9.
7.3.10.
7.3.11.
7.4.
Internal Sensor Types
External Sensor Types
Sensor Connection
External PT-100 Sensor Connection
Programming Limitations for DBSA710 and DBSA720
External Alarm Output
Polarity
Frequency/Pulse Counter
User Defined Sensors
Sensor Alarms
Sensor Calibration
87
87
88
88
89
89
90
90
91
91
91
Unit Serial Number and Comment
91
7.5. Power Supply
7.5.1.
DBSA710 and DBSA720 Data Loggers
7.5.2.
Power Adapter
7.5.3.
Data Logger Battery Life
92
92
92
93
7.6.
93
USB Communication Cable
7.7. DaqLink Keypad Overview
7.7.1.
DBSA710 and DBSA720 Keypad
93
93
7.8. Operating the DBSA710 and DBSA720
7.8.1.
Turning on the Unit
7.8.2.
Display Shutdown
7.8.3.
Main Menu Options
7.8.4.
Additional Logger Screens
94
94
94
94
97
CHAPTER 8:
98
8.1.
MICROLITE OVERVIEW
MicroLite Introduction
98
8.2. MicroLite Packaging
8.2.1.
The Data Logger
8.2.2.
Hardware Accessories
99
99
101
CHAPTER 9:
102
MICROLITE IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE
9.1.
Pre-setup Requirements
102
9.2.
Launching the Software
102
9.3.
Connecting the Logger
103
9.4.
Loading Map View Background
103
9.5.
Configuring the Logger
104
9.6. Viewing Data
9.6.1.
Online Data Views
9.6.2.
Logger Tooltip
9.6.3.
Sensor View
106
106
107
107
9.7.
108
Downloading Data
CHAPTER 10:
MICROLITE HARDWARE OVERVIEW
109
10.1. Data Logger Layout
109
10.2. MicroLite Sensor Overview
10.2.1. Internal Sensor Types
10.2.2. External Sensor Types
10.2.3. User Defined Sensors
10.2.1. Sensor Calibration
110
110
111
111
111
10.3. Unit Serial Number and Comment
111
10.4. Power Supply
10.4.1. Battery Level Indication
10.4.2. Battery Life
10.4.3. Replacing the Battery
111
112
112
113
10.5. USB Connection
113
10.6. LCD Screen Overview
10.6.1. LCD Status Messages
10.6.2. LCD Mode of Operation
114
114
114
10.7. LED Overview
115
10.8. Logger Cap for External Input Models
10.8.1. External Sensor Cap Detection Mechanism
115
115
10.9. Using the MicroLite Magnet
116
10.10. Operating the MicroLite
10.10.1. MicroLite Operating Modes
10.10.2. Turning on the Unit
10.10.3. Viewing Real-time Data on LCD
10.10.4. Viewing Min/Max Readings on LCD
10.10.5. Viewing Firmware Version
10.10.6. Sensor Alarm Levels
10.10.7. Alarm Duration
10.10.8. Marking Time Stamps
116
116
117
117
117
117
117
118
118
CHAPTER 11:
119
MICROLOGPRO II OVERVIEW
11.1. MicroLogPRO II Introduction
119
11.2. MicroLogPRO II Packaging
11.2.1. The Data Logger
11.2.2. Hardware Accessories
119
120
121
CHAPTER 12:
122
MICROLOGPRO II IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE
12.1. Pre-setup Requirements
122
12.2. Launching the Software
122
12.3. Connecting the Logger
123
12.4. Loading Map View Background
124
12.5. Configuring the Logger
124
12.6. Viewing Data
12.6.1. Online Data Views
12.6.2. Logger Tooltip
12.6.3. Sensor View
126
126
127
127
12.7. Downloading Data
128
CHAPTER 13:
129
MICROLOGPRO II HARDWARE OVERVIEW
13.1. Data Logger Front Panel Layout
129
13.2. Data Logger External Connections
130
13.3. Data Logger Sensor Overview
13.3.1. Internal Sensor Types
13.3.2. External Sensor Types
13.3.3. User Defined Sensors
13.3.4. Sensor Alarms
13.3.5. Sensor Calibration
130
131
131
131
131
131
13.4. Unit Serial Number and Comment
132
13.5. Power Supply
13.5.1. Battery Level Indication
13.5.2. Battery Life
13.5.3. Replacing the Battery
132
132
133
133
13.6. USB Communication Cable
133
13.7. LCD Overview
13.7.1. LCD Status Messages
13.7.2. LCD Mode of Operation
134
134
134
13.8. LED Overview
134
13.9. Operating the MicroLogPRO II
13.9.1. MicroLogPRO II Operating Modes
13.9.2. Turning on the Unit
13.9.3. Logger Sleep Mode
13.9.4. Viewing Real-time Data on LCD
13.9.5. Viewing Firmware Version
13.9.6. Displaying Minimum and Maximum Values
13.9.7. Sensor Alarm Levels
135
135
136
136
136
136
137
137
CHAPTER 14:
138
PICOLITE OVERVIEW
14.1. PicoLite Introduction
138
14.2. PicoLite Packaging
139
CHAPTER 15:
140
PICOLITE IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE
15.1. Pre-setup Requirements
140
15.2. Launching the Software
140
15.3. Connecting the Logger
141
15.4. Loading Map View Background
141
15.5. Configuring the Logger
142
15.6. Viewing Data
15.6.1. Online Data Views
15.6.2. Logger Tooltip
15.6.3. Sensor View
143
143
144
145
15.7. Downloading Data
145
CHAPTER 16:
146
PICOLITE HARDWARE OVERVIEW
16.1. Data Logger Layout
146
16.2. PicoLite Sensor Overview
16.2.1. Sensor Calibration
146
146
16.3. Unit Serial Number and Comment
146
16.4. PicoLite Battery
146
16.5. USB Connection
147
16.6. Operating the PicoLite
16.6.1. PicoLite Working Modes
16.6.2. Turning on the Unit
16.6.3. Viewing Firmware Version
16.6.4. Sensor Alarm Levels
16.6.5. Push Button Functionality Overview
16.6.6. LED Functionality Overview
16.6.7. Marking Time Stamps
147
147
148
148
148
148
148
149
CHAPTER 17:
150
USING THE DATASUITE SOFTWARE
17.1. Installing DataSuite Software
17.1.1. System Requirements
17.1.2. Language Support
17.1.3. Working with User Accounts
17.1.4. Installation Procedure
150
150
150
151
151
17.2. DataSuite Software Activation
17.2.1. Software Activation Process
154
154
17.3. DataSuite CFR Module Activation and Login
158
17.4. System Password
159
17.5. DataSuite Software Layout
17.5.1. Map View
17.5.2. Sensor View
17.5.3. History View
17.5.4. Data Map
17.5.5. DataSuite Toolbar Icons
17.5.6. Map View Icons
17.5.7. Graph (Lower) Toolbar Icons
17.5.8. Data Map Icons
159
160
160
162
163
164
165
167
168
17.6. File Menu Items
17.6.1. Open
17.6.2. Open Project File
17.6.3. Save Project
17.6.4. Save Project As
17.6.5. Backup System Files
17.6.6. Restore System Files
17.6.7. Print Map View
17.6.8. Exit
169
169
169
169
169
169
169
170
170
17.7. DataNet Network Menu Items
17.7.1. Show All Network Paths
17.7.2. Refresh All Network Connections
170
170
170
17.8. Tools Menu Items
17.8.1. Define Sensor
17.8.2. Switch Sensor View Mode
17.8.3. Lock Map View
17.8.4. Options Menu
17.8.5. Manage Contacts
17.8.6. Email Alarm Notifications
17.8.7. SMS Alarm Notifications
17.8.8. Firmware Update Center
171
171
172
172
172
172
172
172
173
17.9. Tools > Options Menu Items
17.9.1. Preferences Tab
17.9.2. Device Settings Tab
17.9.3. Email Settings Tab
17.9.4. SMS Settings Tab
17.9.5. Analysis Menu Items
173
173
175
176
178
179
17.10. Devices Menu Items
17.10.1. Detect Device
17.10.2. Stop All
17.10.3. Run All
17.10.4. Auto Setup Mode
180
180
181
181
181
17.11. Search Devices
182
17.12. Data Recovery
183
17.13. Saving Data
184
17.14. Viewing Archived (Offline) Data
184
17.15. Viewing Online Data
17.15.1. Showing/Hiding the Data Sets
186
186
17.16. Working in Map View
17.16.1. Loading Map View Wallpaper
17.16.2. Printing the Map View
17.16.3. Displaying Icon Name Tags
17.16.4. Moving Icons around the Screen
17.16.5. DataNet Multiple Network Connections
17.16.6. DataNet Logger Icon Context Menu – Wireless Connection Options
17.16.7. DataNet Logger Icon Context Menu – USB Connection Options
17.16.8. Viewing DataNet Logger Status
17.16.9. DataNet Receiver Icon Context Menu
17.16.10. Viewing DataNet Receiver Status
17.16.11. DataNet Repeater Icon Context Menu – Wireless Connection Options
187
187
188
188
188
188
188
191
191
192
194
195
17.16.12.
17.16.13.
17.16.14.
17.16.15.
17.16.16.
17.16.17.
17.16.18.
17.16.19.
17.16.20.
DataNet Repeater Icon Context Menu – USB Connection Options
Viewing DataNet Repeater Status
DaqLink Logger Icon Connection Options
MicroLite Logger Icon Connection Options
Viewing MicroLite Logger Status
MicroLogPRO II Logger Icon Connection Options
Viewing MicroLogPRO II Logger Status
PicoLite Logger Icon Connection Options
Viewing PicoLite Logger Status
196
196
197
198
199
200
201
201
203
17.17. Configuring the Logger
17.17.1. DataNet Device Setup Tab
17.17.2. DaqLink Device Setup Tab
17.17.3. DataNet and DaqLink Alarm Setup Tab
17.17.4. MicroLite & MicroLogPRO II Setup Window
17.17.5. PicoLite Properties, Sensor and Display Setup
17.17.6. Using the Auto Setup Mode
203
203
206
208
210
214
218
17.18. Entering Alarm Reason in CFR Mode
219
17.19. Alarm Notifications Setup
17.19.1. Contacts Tab
17.19.2. Groups Tab
17.19.3. Notifications Setup Tab
17.19.4. Email and SMS Notification Formats
220
221
222
223
224
17.20. Calibration Overview
224
17.20.1. Recommended Calibration Methodology
225
17.20.2. Logger Calibration Methods
226
17.20.3. Calibration Procedure
227
17.20.4. Performing a Two or Three-point Calibration
228
17.20.5. Performing an Offset Calibration
230
17.20.6. Calibrating the Internal Temperature Sensor for DataNet and DaqLink Loggers
230
17.20.7. Calibrating the External PT-100 Sensor Input
230
17.20.8. Calibrating Thermocouple Inputs
231
17.20.9. Saving and Loading DataNet and DaqLink Calibration Settings
231
17.20.10. New Calibration Mechanism when Updating MicroLite and MicroLogPRO II
Firmware
231
17.21. Analyzing the Data
17.21.1. Using the Graph Features
17.21.2. Viewing Time Stamps
17.21.3. Changing the Graph, Table or Statistics View Header
17.21.4. Statistical Analysis
232
232
236
237
237
17.22. Exporting Data to Excel or CSV Formats
238
17.23. Printing the Data
238
17.24. Reports Module
17.24.1. Creating a Report Profile
17.24.2. Report Types
17.24.3. Removing a Report Profile
17.24.4. The Report Browser
239
239
241
243
244
17.25. Boomerang Report Overview
17.25.1. Boomerang Setup – Point of Origin
17.25.2. Boomerang Setup – Destination Computer
17.25.3. Boomerang Email and Report Examples
244
245
246
246
CHAPTER 18:
UPDATING DATASUITE SOFTWARE AND FIRMWARE
248
18.1. Using the Uptodata Client
248
18.2. Updating Device Firmware
18.2.1. Downloading the Firmware File
18.2.2. Using the Firmware Update Center
18.2.3. Manual Firmware Update via Map View Icon
18.2.4. DataNet Firmware Update via USB
18.2.5. Cancelling Firmware Update
18.2.6. Interrupted Firmware Update
250
250
250
252
253
254
255
APPENDIX A:
256
DATANET SPECIFICATIONS
18.3. DNR900, DNL910, DNL920, PA Unit Outputs
256
18.4. Logger Input Specifications DNL910, DNL920 and PA models
257
18.5. Mini DataNet Sensor Specifications
258
18.6. General Specifications
258
18.7. System Requirements
261
APPENDIX B:
262
DAQLINK SPECIFICATIONS
18.8. Data Logger Input Types
262
18.9. DBSA710 and DBSA720 Outputs
262
18.10. Logger Input Specifications DBSA710 and DBSA720
262
18.11. General Specifications
263
18.12. System Requirements
264
APPENDIX C:
265
MICROLITE SPECIFICATIONS
18.13. General Specifications
265
18.14. System Requirements
266
APPENDIX D:
267
MICROLOGPRO II SPECIFICATIONS
18.15. General Specifications
267
18.1. External Sensor Specifications
268
18.2. System Requirements
268
APPENDIX E:
269
PICOLITE SPECIFICATIONS
18.3. General Specifications
269
18.4. System Requirements
269
APPENDIX F:
DATANET MOUNTING DIAGRAMS
270
APPENDIX G:
MINI DATANET BXT ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
272
APPENDIX H:
SAFETY INFORMATION AND FCC IDS
274
APPENDIX I:
ORDERING INFORMATION
277
Chapter 1:
Introduction
DataSuite software from Fourtec provides a modular platform which supports a wide
range of Fourtec data loggers. Use DataSuite to monitor and analyze data from
multiple systems in one, unified view.
The DataSuite solution supports simultaneous connection of the following Fourtec
data acquisition systems.

DataNet Wireless
Logging System

DaqLink
Standalone Multiinput Logger

MicroLite Multitrip USB Logger

MicroLogPRO II
Multi-input USB
Logger

PicoLite Single
Trip USB Logger
DataSuite key features include:

Software GUI based on proven Fourtec platforms

Multiple data view features

Map view displaying unit icons and pertinent configuration details

Boomerang feature for automatic creation and emailing of PDF data reports upon
logger detection

Alarm features with multiple alarm levels triggering email and SMS notifications
15

Reporting module for creating and generating reports with selected distribution

Analysis features including dew point analysis, FO Pasteurization, histogram,
statistics with export to Excel and CSV formats

FDA Title 21 CFR Part 11 compliancy

API support
DataSuite CFR Compliancy
DataSuite includes an additional CFR module which together with the separate
DatPass Administrative software achieves compliance with FDA Title 21 CFR Part
11. Among other features, it defines the users that can log into the DataSuite
software, their passwords and the digital signatures the users are permitted to sign
data within electronic records (files). DatPass also maintains an audit trail to keep
track of all activities performed within the system and user privileges can be defined
as well. The CFR module includes a 30-day free trial period following which the
module must be activated using a unique license key. The CFR module supports all
hardware connected to DataSuite.
User Guide Overview
This user guide includes instructions for the DataNet, DaqLink, MicroLite,
MicroLogPRO II and PicoLite products.
It is comprised of the following chapters:

Chapter 1: Introduction

Chapters 2-4: DataNet

Chapters 5-7: DaqLink

Chapters 8-10: MicroLite II

Chapters 11-13: MicroLogPRO II

Chapters 14-16: PicoLite

Chapter 17: Using the DataSuite Software

Chapter 18: Updating DataSuite Software and Firmware

Appendices A-I
16
Chapter 2:
DataNet Overview
This chapter provides a general overview of the DataNet system as well as the
concept behind the ZigBee RF protocol.
2.1.
DataNet Introduction
Multi-point, online, wireless data monitoring system
Fourtec’s next generation data logging system is the DataNet, a 16-bit, mobile data
acquisition network based on the innovative and reliable ZigBee technology. This
solution provides an intelligent sensor mesh system with 100% data receipt and no
data loss.
The DataNet system is comprised of a family of data logging units, as well as a
Receiver to manage the intelligent network and Repeaters to extend the transmission
range. The data loggers measure a broad range of parameters and include models
that feature between one and four inputs for direct measurement and recording of
PT-100, thermocouple, 0 to 1 V, 4 to 20 mA, contact, frequency and pulse sensors,
as well as internal temperature and relative humidity sensors. These models range
from loggers with graphic display, AC or battery power supply, and power
amplification, to models with no display and battery power only.
Data is transmitted from the end units to a Receiver connected to a central computer.
The system leverages the ZigBee protocol, a 2.4 GHz license-free frequency RF
band, to ensure full data integrity. By adding DataNet Repeater units or loggers with
power amplification to the network, you can extend the transmission range and form
a reliable mesh network of up to 65,000 units.
With its high resolution and fast Analog to Digital converter (ADC), DataNet data
loggers meet the majority of data acquisition requirements in most industrial
applications. Every DataNet logger unit is embedded with a unique serial number and
can be loaded with a descriptive comment for safe identification. An internal clock
and calendar keeps track of the time and date of every sample measured.
DataNet loggers can automatically activate external alarm events when data is
outside a specified range. Email and SMS notifications can be sent to predefined
contacts.
The DataNet system is powered by the powerful DataSuite software. The Windows
 based software is the central management interface of the DataNet network. Data
is monitored online and can be displayed in graphs or tables. You can analyze data
with various mathematical tools, or export data to a spreadsheet. Detailed reports
can also be generated from the system, collating a wealth of relevant system data.
The software also enables you to configure, calibrate or update the firmware of
DataNet units wirelessly.
Key DataNet benefits include:

Reliable transmission ensuring no data loss

Long-range monitoring

Ability to constantly expand transmission range by adding additional Repeaters,
or turning loggers into Repeaters
17

Portable units facilitating easy deployment in various environments

Remote programming and firmware updates

65,000+ possible end units per network

Low-power consumption

Long battery life

Minimal costs thanks to wireless infrastructure

Feature-rich software, including multi-network support per PC
2.2.
What is ZigBee?
ZigBee is a standards-based protocol built around the IEEE * 802.15.4 wireless
protocol, providing the network infrastructure required for wireless, low power
network applications.
The mesh network eliminates single points of failure by providing multiple pathways
for data to travel.
* IEEE is the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, a non-profit
organization dedicated to furthering technology involving electronics and electronic
devices.
2.3.
The ZigBee Concept
The Coordinator: This device creates and maintains the network. Once the network
is up and running, the coordinator behaves as just another device on the network.
There is only one Coordinator in a ZigBee network.
The Router: A router relays data packets/messages between devices on the network
and increases the distance between these devices.
The End Unit: This device sends and receives information to other devices on the
network. It is usually a control or a sensor unit, often battery operated. A ZigBee end
unit cannot relay messages.
ZigBee Terminology
DataNet Terminology
Coordinator
Receiver
Router
Repeater
End Unit
Data Logger
ZigBee enables mesh networking which supports a wireless, yet integrated
environment with communication between many coordinators, routers and end units
in environments where multiple applications are being monitored.
2.3.1.
ZigBee Mesh Network Operation
Figure 1: ZigBee network diagram
18
In a mesh network, all the router units are aware of their environment meaning a
router knows with units are close by. When a router sends a message to a specific
unit, it relays the message until it gets to the destination.
Network recovery from a unit failure
In a mesh network, when a router fails, the network automatically finds a different
path via a different router for the message relay.
This ensures maximum protection against a network breakdown.
2.3.2.
Why is ZigBee Technology Key for Data Logging?
ZigBee technology has proved to be ideal for data acquisition networks which require
meter reading, parametric display of data such as temperature or humidity and
responsive action when parameters are crossed. This is due to the fully automated,
flexible and reliable nature of the protocol. With the Mesh Network system, the
ZigBee standard redresses misbalances in any data logging system, responding to
weaknesses, inefficiencies, new network structure (with the additional or removal of
devices) through self correction.
2.4.
The DataNet System
The basic DataNet system will contain at least one of the following units:

DataNet data logger – Part Number DNL804, DNL808, DNL810, DNL804-BXT,
DNL808-BXT, DNL810-BXT, DNL910, DNL920, DNL910-PA, DNL920-PA

Receiver/Repeater unit – Part Number DNR900

Mini Repeater – Part Number DNR800

Mini-USB cable

Power adapter (one per DataNet unit ordered)

DataSuite Software CD with unique serial number
2.4.1.
The Data Logger
There are seven distinct data logger models compatible with the DataNet system.
These are the so-called end units of the system. These loggers support up to four
external sensors and two internal sensors, temperature and humidity, depending on
the specific model. Data is recorded and stored to the logger’s internal memory and
transmitted over the network to the DataSuite software running on the PC.
The data logger is programmed to consume as little power as possible during
operation, in order to conserve the battery life. When not transmitting or recording
data the units are in sleep mode and they wake up when needed.
The battery for the DNL910 and DNL920 is rechargeable and can run up to several
months on one charge, depending on the logger configuration.
The DNL910-PA and DNL920-PA loggers include power amplification (PA), enabling
longer transmission range compared to the non-PA units, and as a result has high
power consumption. The PA units therefore must be connected to AC power at all
times otherwise its battery will drain after a few hours.
The battery for the DNL804, DNL808 and DNL810 is not rechargeable and can run
up to ten months before being replaced, depending on the logger configuration.
19
The DNL8XX-BXT models provide extended battery life to the existing Mini DataNet
loggers, for up to 3 years with 4 x AA 3.6V batteries connected.
Refer to section ‎4.9.7 for more information.
Note: Battery life depends on the logger sampling rate, transmission rate, type of
sensor, network architecture and number of measured sensors.
The seven DataNet models can be divided into two groups:

DataNet loggers (with LCD)

Mini DataNet loggers (without LCD)
DataNet Loggers (with LCD)
Part Number: DNL920 and
DNL920-PA
Part Number: DNL910 and
DNL920-PA
Four external channel RF data logger
with two internal sensors, Humidity
and Temperature.
Four external channel RF data
logger with internal Temperature
sensor.
* PA model includes Power Amplifier
for long-range transmission.
Transmission Range:
DNL920: 4 dBm
* PA model includes Power Amplifier
for long-range transmission.
Transmission Range:
DNL920-PA: 17 dBm
Memory Capacity: ~59,000 samples
DNL910-PA: 17 dBm
DNL910: 4 dBm
Power supply: AC or battery
operated
20
Memory Capacity: ~59,000
samples
Power supply: AC or battery
operated
Mini DataNet Loggers (without LCD)
DNL804
DNL804BXT
Single channel RF data
logger supporting external 4
to 20 mA input
DNL808
DNL808-BXT
Single channel RF data
logger supporting external
temperature NTC 10KΩ
probe
DNL810
DNL810BXT
Dual channel RF data
logger with internal
Temperature and
Humidity sensors.
DNL8XX-BXT Models
BXT models include built-in battery pack supporting up to 4 x AA 3.6 batteries, for
extended battery life of 3-years (depending on sampling rate). Functionality is identical
to regular Mini DataNet loggers. Only external casing and battery supply is different.
Transmission Range:
Transmission Range:
Transmission Range:
4 dBm
4 dBm
4 dBm
Memory Capacity:
~59,000 samples
Power supply:
Battery operated
Memory Capacity: ~59,000
samples
Power supply:
Battery operated
Memory Capacity:
~59,000 samples
Power supply:
Battery operated
2.4.2.
The Receiver/Repeater
Note: The DNR900 can work in one of two modes, Receiver or Repeater. The
DNR800 only works as a Repeater.
The Receiver DNR900, acts as a bridge between the DataNet network and the PC.
It is connected to the PC via USB cable and is used to create the network to which
you add your data loggers. The Receiver is externally powered but also includes a
rechargeable battery for back up (in case the external power fails).
More than one Receiver may be detected by the software, enabling the running of
multiple DataNet networks from one PC.
Note: Each Receiver can detect up to 8 data loggers and 16 Repeaters. To detect
more data loggers, Repeaters are required.
The Repeater is considered the backbone of the network, as it enhances the
network range by receiving and transmitting between end unit and Repeater until it
reaches the PC. There are two Repeater models, the DNR900 with LCD and the
DNR800 Mini Repeater, without LCD. Both are externally powered via the AC
21
adapter but the DNR900 also includes a rechargeable battery back-up (in case the
external power fails).
The Repeaters are the end units’ parent units, meaning each Repeater has specific
end units under their responsibility (their children). They route the transmissions to
and from the end units to the Receiver (or other Repeaters in the network).
Each Repeater holds the data sent to the end units while the end units are in sleep
mode. At a specific interval the end unit wakes up and receives the data from its
parent (Repeater).
Note: Each Repeater can detect up to 24 data loggers and 16 Repeaters including
the parent unit. If the number of loggers exceeds this capability, additional Repeaters
are required.
Receiver/Repeater with LCD
Part Number: DNR900
Repeater Transmission Range: 17 dBm
End Units per Receiver: ~65,000
22
Mini Repeater (without LCD)
Part Number: DNR800
Repeater Transmission Range: 20 dBm
End Units per Receiver: ~65,000
2.4.3.
Hardware Accessories
The DataNet system includes the following accessories:

Mini-USB cable for connecting PC to DataNet Receiver

Power adapter to power DataNet Receiver, Repeater and data loggers
2.4.4.
DataSuite Software
The user interface for the DataNet system, the DataSuite software CD is provided
together with the DataNet hardware and includes the following features:

Multiple Network management

Data display, management, storage and data diagnostics

Alarm settings: Email and SMS notifications, visual and audible alarms

Reports module

Wireless sensor definition

Wireless sensor calibration

Wireless firmware update (boot over the air)

Data download via USB

Automatic software update (via Fourtec server)
The DataSuite for DataNet module is run together with additional modules such as
DaqLink and MicroLogPRO II to allow multiple data view from multiple logger models
within one graph view.
The software interface is described in detail in ‎Chapter 17: Using the DataSuite
Software.
23
Chapter 3:
DataNet Implementation Guide
Fourtec strongly recommends first time users of the DataNet system read this
chapter before drilling down into the many features of the system described later in
the user guide. The Implementation Guide will give you a clear understanding of the
basic aspects of setting up the system, and getting your network up and running.
Once you are familiar with the technical aspects of setting up the network as outlined
in this chapter, please consult section ‎3.8 for Fourtec’s recommended approach to
initial deployment of the DataNet system.
Example
Below is a diagram depicting a supermarket deployment of a DataNet system,
illustrating how the devices may be positioned to provide full coverage within the
facility.
Figure 2: Example of DataNet network application
3.1.
DataNet Network Architecture
The DataNet network architecture consists of layers of loggers and Repeaters,
forming a mesh network monitored by the Receiver unit connected to the workstation
PC.
The basic architecture is as follows:

Maximum nodes per network: 65,000

DNR900 Receiver recognizes up to 8 loggers and 16 Repeaters

DNR900 Repeater and DNR800 Mini Repeater recognizes up to 24 loggers and
16 Repeaters (including parent unit)

DNL910 and DNL920 (including the PA models) in Short Range Repeater mode
(refer to section ‎3.8.5) recognizes up to 24 loggers and 16 Repeaters
The diagrams below show the architecture of a typical DataNet mesh network.
Repeaters and loggers, which are being used as Short Range Repeaters in Figure 4
(see section), can be added to the network in order to extend the range and improve
its robustness. Each such device has end units communicating with it, but this route
may change as the RF environment changes. This is the ZigBee self correcting
mechanism at play.
24
DL
1
DL
8
DL
1
DL
24
RC
1
DL
RP
RP
1
16
DL
24
RP
RP
1
15
Figure 3: Standard DataNet mesh network architecture
USB
DL
DL
DL
DL
RC
DL
DL
DL
DL
DL
DL
RP
DL
RP
SRR
DL
RP
DL
RP
DL
DL
RP
SRR
DL
DL
DL
DL
DL
DL
DL
DL
DL
DL
Figure 4: DataNet network with Short Range Repeaters
3.2.
Pre-setup Requirements
Prior to commencing with the DataNet implementation you must have the following
requirements in place:
PC

24/7 availability

Reliable AC power

Sufficient hard disk space to store loggers’ data

One free USB port
DataNet devices

One DNR900 DataNet Receiver

At least one DataNet logger DNL910, DNL920, DNL910-PA, DNL920-PA, or Mini
DataNet logger DNL804, DNL808 or DNL810 (or BXT models)
25

At least one DNR900 DataNet Repeater or DNR800 Mini Repeater, depending on
your RF environment
Mini-USB cable
The mini-USB cable connects the DNR900 Receiver to the PC (and is supplied with
the PC Suite software kit).
3.3.
Launching the Software
1. Install the DataSuite software on the PC workstation. Refer to section ‎17.1:
Installing DataSuite Software on page 150 for more details.
2. Once the software and associated components have been installed, launch
DataSuite from your DataSuite desktop shortcut
.
3. Software activation window will open. Select the DataNet module button. To start
the 30-day Trial version, select the Start trial option and click Next. To activate
the software refer to chapter ‎17.2.
4. The main DataSuite window is launched. The default view is called Map View.
Figure 5: Main DataSuite window
5. Check for DataSuite updates. Go to Help > Check for Updates from the
DataSuite main menu to check for newer versions of the DataNet module
software and firmware released since you purchased your system. For more
details on the Update feature go to ‎Chapter 18: Updating DataSuite Software and
Firmware.
3.4.
Connecting the Receiver
1. Only once the DataSuite software has been installed and activated (either by
starting the Trial or activating the module with a serial number), connect the
DataNet Receiver/Repeater unit (DNR900) to the Fourtec-supplied power
adapter.
26
Note: Only use adapters provided by Fourtec. Use of the wrong adapter could
damage your DataNet units.
2. Turn on the unit by pressing the Scroll button
will beep when turned on.
on the front keypad. The unit
3. Verify that the unit is in Receiver mode by seeing the following screen on the
LCD:
Receiver
ID: 123.456.789
4. The ID will be unique to your Receiver network. If the unit is in Repeater mode,
switch it to Receiver mode. Go to section ‎4.15 for more details.
5. Connect the mini-USB cable to the computer and to the Receiver’s mini-USB
port. The DataNet Receiver icon
corner of the Map View.
will immediately appear in the top left
Figure 6: Adding Receiver icon to Map View
6. A green icon indicates that the Receiver is online.
Note: If the Receiver is not recognized by the software try connecting the mini-USB
cable to another USB port on the PC. Or select Devices > Detect Device in the main
menu.
7. Should you disconnect the Receiver’s USB cable or power adapter (and the
battery eventually dies), the Receiver icon will be grayed out:
8. Right-click the Receiver icon and select Form New Network from the context
menu. The Receiver will then form a new network based on your RF environment
rather than use the network formed in the factory. This will ensure optimal
network performance. Refer to section ‎3.8: Optimizing the Network for more
details.
9. Check the DataNet network ID that was formed by the Receiver by placing the
mouse cursor over the Receiver icon. The network ID as well as network name,
Receiver firmware version and unit serial number is displayed.
27
Figure 7: Receiver tooltip
Note: You can move the Receiver icon elsewhere on the screen by going to Tools >
Lock Map View and unselecting this option.
3.5.
Adding the Data Logger to the Network
Once you have connected your Receiver and established a network you are ready to
add data loggers and build your system.
3.5.1.
Charging DataNet Loggers
This section refers to charging the DNL910 or DNL920 loggers. The Mini DataNet
units are battery operated only.
Note: Only use adapters provided by Fourtec. Use of the wrong adapter could
damage your DataNet units.
Note: DataNet units do not charge when switched off.
If the loggers will run from the battery supply make sure to first charge each of the
loggers for 16 hours before use in order maximize the battery life. A fully charged
battery can last several months, depending on your logger configuration. Refer to
section ‎4.9.7 or more details on battery life.
If the loggers will run from the AC power supply, when first connected to the AC
adapter the logger will always initiate the 16 hour charge cycle.
However, if you reconnect the AC charger within one hour of disconnection from the
unit, the logger will not start a new 16 hour charging cycle as long as battery level is
at least 90%.
Note: For loggers measuring data with the internal temperature sensor, it is critical to
note that during the charge cycle the logger will heat up thereby causing the internal
temperature sensor reading to rise up to 10 ˚C above ambient temperature. Once the
charging process is complete, the logger will cool down and the internal temperature
sensor readings will return to normal.
For loggers remaining connected to AC power, to prevent the logger from heating up
again following the initial charge cycle, the logger will receive a one minute trickle
charge each day rather than stay continually charged. This is sufficient to ensure the
logger doesn’t self-discharge and will maintain the logger’s full charge status.
Refer to section ‎4.9.3 for more details on the DataNet loggers’ power supply.
28
3.5.2.
Connecting DNL910 and DNL920 Loggers to the
Network
* Includes the PA models
1. Turn on the logger by pressing the Scroll button
. The unit will beep when
turned on. As soon as the unit is turned on, the LCD screen will display the
following message:
Fourtec DataNet
Logger
2. The logger will then start scanning for networks. The LCD will indicate how many
networks were found in range, and will announce when the scan is complete.
Locked networks will not be listed.
Scan for network
Scan for network
Found 2 networks
Scan complete
To join the network created by your Receiver (there may be other networks created
by your colleagues) scroll through the found networks on the LCD (using the logger
Scroll button) and press the Enter button
when you reach the required network.
In the example below, the network required is the second network found. You can
also rescan the networks by pressing Enter on the Rescan networks screen, which is
reached by scrolling through all the found networks.
Network 1:
ID: 014.061.082
Network 2:
ID: 026.167.85
Rescan networks
Note: If the logger did not detect a network, the unit will turn off in order to conserve
the battery.
3. Once you select the network, the logger will automatically join that network and a
new message will be displayed on the LCD:
Joined network:
ID: 026.167.85
Note: If the message ‘Join failed’ appears on the LCD, then rescan for the network
and try again. If the logger continually fails to join, then form a new network on the
Receiver.
4. The LCD will then indicate the following status message:
Fourtec DataNet
Ready
29
If the Receiver is disconnected for any reason, the following message is displayed:
Fourtec
No Receiver
5. When the logger joins the network, the Logger icon
appear in the Map View.
will automatically
a. The
symbol indicates the signal strength of the logger in the network.
b. The
symbol indicates that the logger is running from internal battery
supply. The
symbol indicates that the logger is running from external
power supply.
c. The
symbol indicates that the logger is a new addition to the network and
has not yet been configured (setup).
6. Repeat steps 1-3 for every logger in your system.
7. In order to find the physical location of the logger you can right-click on the
Logger icon in Map View and select Call Unit (Beep). The logger will then beep.
3.5.3.
Connecting Mini DataNet Loggers and Mini Repeater
to the Network
The Mini DataNet loggers (DNL804, DNL808, DNL810 and BXT units) and Mini
Repeater (DNR800) don’t have LCD screens therefore the process of joining these
units to the network differs than that of the DataNet models with LCD.
Follow the steps below to connect these devices to a specific network.
1. Right-click the Receiver icon and select Mini DataNet Device Filter to first define
the Mini DataNet devices that are allowed to connect to the network. Enable the
User Filter checkbox and then enter the SN of each Mini DataNet device in the
text window and click Add. Click Remove to remove a SN of a device you don’t
wish to join the network.
Note: Note that by disabling the Device Filter (unselect the Use Filter checkbox),
any Mini DataNet device is free to join your network. It is recommended to use
the filter if running multiple networks.
30
Figure 8: Mini DataNet Device Filter dialog
If a Mini DataNet device tries to join the network but it is not in the list then the
software will send the Leave Network command to the device as it tries to
connect to the network.
When a device tries to connect to a network and the software is down it will
continue to the next available network. If the software is up either the software will
accept it or it will send the Leave Network command.
2. Ensure the network is not locked. Right-click on the Receiver Map View icon and
uncheck the Lock Network menu item.
3. Take the first Mini DataNet device and from an Off state give the button on the
front panel a short press. The green LED will blink once every second until the
logger joins the network. The device icon will appear in the Map View.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for all Mini DataNet devices you wish to join to the network.
5. For more details on joining Mini DataNet units to the network, refer to section
‎4.13.
3.5.4.
Loading Map View Background
Load an image into DataSuite showing a map of your facility in order to place the
Receiver and Logger icons in their relative positions. As you add more loggers to the
system, this will prove very helpful.

Double click the Map View background to browse to the image directory and load
the image. Remember to unlock the Map View in order to move the icons around.

Right-click the Map View background and two options will be available: Load
Wallpaper and Reset Wallpaper, which resets to the default Fourtec wallpaper.
31
Figure 9: Map View background image example
3.6.
Configuring the Logger
Once you connected your DataNet loggers to the network, you must configure them
in order to start acquiring data.
1. Right-click on the Logger icon you wish to configure. Select Setup from the
context menu.
2. The Setup window will be launched.
Figure 10: Logger Setup window
This dialog provides non-editable information such as the serial number, battery
level, reception level and firmware version of the current unit.
On the Device Setup and Alarm Setup tabs, the user is able to configure the
following parameters:
32
 Unit's comment
 Sampling rate
 Transmission interval
 Samples averaging
 Temperature units °C/°F (on the logger LCD. Not applicable for Mini DataNet
loggers)
 Active sensors
 Custom sensors' names
 Alarm levels
 Alarm duration
 Alarm delay
 Alarm pre delay
3. Select the sensors you wish to connect to the logger for data acquisition. It
doesn’t matter which order you select the sensors. You may only have Input 4
selected, for example, and Inputs 1 to 3 left unselected.
4. Select the sampling rate and transmission interval (rate at which the data is
transmitted from the logger to the Receiver).
5. Unless you have Alarm levels you wish to edit (see the Alarms Setup tab), click
either Setup and Run (to send the setup and immediately log data), or Setup
Only (to send the setup but only log data at your command).
6. If you selected Setup Only in step 4, right-click the Logger icon and select Run
from the context menu to start logging data.
7. To stop the logger, right-click the Logger icon and select Stop from the context
menu.
Note: Running the logger clears the logger memory. All previously recorded data will
be erased when you begin a new logging session.
3.7.
Viewing Data
Once you run the logger, you have several ways of viewing the online data that is
being acquired.

Online graph/table/statistics views

Logger icon tooltip

Sensor view
3.7.1.
Online Data Views
Double clicking the Logger icon or selecting Display Data in the Logger icon context
menu will open the online graph.
This graph is updated in real-time with the newly recorded data.
You can switch between Graph, Table and Statistics views to view the data in
different formats.
33
Figure 11: Online data – Graph view
Figure 12: Online data – Table view
Figure 13: Online data – Statistics view
3.7.2.
Logger Tooltip
Close the online data window and return to Map View. Scroll over the Logger icon
and you will see a tooltip displaying the relevant logger information, including realtime data.
34
Figure 14: Logger tooltip
This tool-tip is updated with every newly recorded sample.
3.7.3.
Sensor View
Click the Sensor View icon
in the tool bar to switch to this view. Here, you can
monitor the data by viewing data display of each individual sensor, rather than of
each logger.
Figure 15: Sensor view

If the sensor is in alarm, the sensor window will change color from green to red
(just as the Logger icon would)

Double-clicking the individual sensor window will open the data in the online
Graph view

Scrolling over the sensor window with the mouse cursor will display the logger
tool tip with relevant logger data (similar to Map View)
Refer to section ‎17.5.2 for more details on using the Sensor View.
Note: By going to Tools > Switch Sensor View Mode you can reduce the size of
the sensor window to display only the sensor type and sensor data. Recommended
for networks containing many loggers.
3.8.
Optimizing the Network
This section outlines a number of features and suggestions for optimizing the
DataNet network and getting the best performance out of the end units and parent
units.
For example, when you first setup your network, you want to ensure that the loggers
are placed in the optimum position in order to receive and transmit data to/from the
DataSuite software.
35
Refer to the DataNet specifications to guide you on the range of the DataNet units.
With this knowledge, and based on the layout of your facility, you should have a good
idea of the likely positional layout of your units.
3.8.1.
Signal Test Utility
Rather than setup the system on a trial and error basis, DataNet has a Signal Test
utility built in to the logger firmware, which gives you a clear idea of the strength of
the signal of each logger to the Receiver, and the quality of the data link between
Receiver and logger.
Perform the following test on each logger in your system while deciding where to
position the logger:
1. Using the Scroll button, scroll through the main menu on the logger until you
reach the following display:
Signal level:
Run test -> Menu
2. sPress the Menu button to run the test.
The signal level and link quality will be displayed. As you move the logger further
away from the Receiver, you will see these two parameters drop from a maximum
of 100%.
When the logger is out of range of the Receiver, you will see the following screen:
Out of range
3. sTo exit the Signal test, press the Scroll button.
3.8.2.
Overcoming RF Obstacles
A universal issue concerning any wireless system is how to overcome a hostile RF
environment. DataNet’s ZigBee RF protocol has been designed for these hostile RF
environments that routinely exist onsite. ZigBee can overcome competing wireless
noise and other problems communicating the data.
Its mesh networking capabilities allows it to re-route signal traffic around temporary
or permanent physical obstacles, radio-frequency interference, Repeater error or
other such failures.
The robustness of the system is such that there is no single point of failure, ensuring
data recovery from end units on the network.
Tips on overcoming RF barriers

When first creating the network in the environment where the loggers will be
deployed, form a new network on the Receiver. There may be local interference
on the 2.4 GHz free bandwidth. The ZigBee protocol, when forming a new
network, selects the least noisy channel (out of 16 available channels). Within this
channel the units can change RF slots (by hopping) but cannot move to other
channels while running. By running on a channel on a network created in another
36
environment e.g. in the office, this channel may become noisy and therefore
transmission range may be less than expected.

When placing units in an indoor or outdoor environment, bear in mind that walls,
furniture, metal objects, etc. limit the RF coverage thereby reducing the range of
the units.

Add Repeaters (DNR800 or DNR900) in range of end units and parent unit to
enhance RF coverage and improve robustness of network. Have as many
alternative transmission routes as possible in order to eliminate single points of
failure.

When placing Repeater ensure it is not on the limit of its range to the end unit or
parent unit (Repeater or Receiver), to avoid periods of unavailability due to
changing RF conditions.

Enable DNL910 or DNL920 logger to work as Short Range Repeaters (using the
software), or deploy DNL910-PA or DNL920-PA loggers (which by default
operate as both loggers and Repeaters), to overcome RF interference nearby the
loggers.

The higher the Receiver is positioned the better reception quality it will obtain.
3.8.3.
Showing the Network Path
For All Networks
By going to DataNet Network > Show All Network Paths in the DataSuite main
menu, the software will show the actual path that the system uses to communicate
between Receiver and logger, for all online networks and associated units.
For Specific Networks
Right-click on the Receiver icon and select Show Network Paths to see paths for a
specific network.
For Specific Units
You can also select Show Network Path from the logger context menu to display the
individual path from the unit to the parent unit (e.g. Receiver or Repeater).
Figure 16: Showing network paths – Example 1
37
Figure 17: Showing network paths – Example 2
The screenshot above shows a system of three loggers (red squares) and two
Repeaters (blue circles) transmitting to the Receiver.
The arrows show the path between the units. Note that they are bi-directional,
meaning that the system is a two-way system with units both transmitting and
receiving data.

A green path indicates a strong signal

A yellow path indicate a medium strength signal

A red path indicates a weak signal
3.8.4.
Adding Repeaters to the Network
Loggers which aren’t in range of the Receiver can transmit to the Receiver via a
Repeater/Short Range Repeater, which is in range. As DataNet is built using mesh
networking technology Repeaters (DNR800 or DNR900) can be added to the system
to enhance the network range.
The DNR900 Receiver/Repeater is the same device, just configured differently from
the main menu when turned on. Refer to section ‎4.14.3 to learn how to switch the
DNR900 unit type to Repeater.
The DNR800 only functions as a Repeater.
3.8.5.
Using Loggers as Repeaters
You may also enable a DNL910 or DNL920 logger to operate as a Repeater in
addition to its logging capabilities. In this mode the logger is referred to as a Short
Range Repeater (SRR). Furthermore, the DNL910-PA and DNL920-PA units by
default operate as both a logger and a Repeater, and due to its built-in power
amplification, have a long transmission range similar to the DNR900.
When in SRR mode the DNL910 and DNL920 loggers maintain the transmission
range in accordance with its own specifications. Therefore, they will transmit at 4
dBm and the DNL910-PA and DNL920-PA will transmit at a greater range of 17 dBm.
To switch a logger to SRR mode, simply right-click the logger icon in the DataSuite
software Map View and select Enable Short Range Repeater Mode.
38
Note: Any device used as both a Logger/Repeater must be connected to AC power
at all times as the power consumption is much greater.
3.9.
Recommended Approach to Deploying
DataNet Units
Now that you have a general understanding of how the DataNet system functions,
you may wish to use Fourtec’s recommended approach for initial deployment of the
system. This approach will ensure a smooth and efficient deployment of your
DataNet units and you may then tweak this approach based on experience you gain
while using the system.
Note: When deploying the system bear in mind that several factors could cause
interference with the system, such as electromagnetic pulses, metal shielding in the
vicinity of the transmissions, other devices using the same 2.4 GHz band, etc. Be
familiar with your environment before deploying the system. Also refer to section ‎3.8.
1. After you have charged the DataNet units and are ready to deploy them in your
facility, collect all units - data logger end units, Receiver and Repeaters (if
relevant) – and bring them to your PC workstation.
2. Connect the Receiver to the PC and form a network. Turn on the units and one
by one bring them online so you can view their icons in the DataSuite software’s
Map View.
3. Configure each of the units via the Setup feature. At this stage it is not necessary
to configure the type of sensors you will be using, or sample rate, alarm levels,
etc. The point of this step is to configure each of the units with a logger or
Repeater name that indicates where in your facility they will be deployed. For
example, Room 15 Freezer or Floor 2 Bio Lab. This will make it much easier for
you to recognize the units in the Map View once you have deployed them. Once
in place, you can reconfigure the units however you like.
4. It is also recommended, if possible, to change the Map View default background
to a diagram or map of your facility. You can then move the logger or Repeater
icons accordingly so you can have a visual representation of their location in the
facility.
5. Take each logger and begin to distribute in your facility in the precise location you
would like them to be based. Once in position you can then run the Signal Test
on each logger to verify that you have a good signal to the Receiver. If you are
out of range and there is no alternative location for the logger, you will most likely
have to add at least one Repeater to the network, or replace the existing logger
with a PA logger for longer transmission range.
6. Once each of the loggers is in position return to the PC and in Map View, verify
that each of the loggers is online. You can also use the Show Network Paths
feature to see the path of the logger to the Receiver, and the strength of the
transmission.
7. If you determine that you need to add Repeater/s to the network in order to bring
end units online or enhance the transmission where the signal is weak, then
deploy the Repeater/s with the following points in mind:
a. There must be an electrical socket accessible at the location of the Repeater
as they must be powered externally in order to run for more than a few hours.
b. Place the Repeater/s as high from the ground as possible in order to enhance
the wireless signal from its antenna.
39
c. Expose the Repeater/s to as many end units as possible. For example, if
there is a room with several offline end units requiring a Repeater, position
the Repeater next to the room so that it is in range of as many of these end
units as possible, so you don’t have to add more Repeaters.
8. After you have deployed the Repeater/s return to the software and using the
Show Network Paths feature verify that all end units are now successfully
transmitting to the Receiver, either on their own or via a parent Repeater. You
can continue to tweak the position of the units until you are satisfied with the
quality of the transmission.
9. Now that the units are in place the last step of initial deployment is to reconfigure
each unit to start data acquisition. Configure the sensor setup, sample rate,
transmission rate, alarm levels, Email/SMS notifications, etc. as you see fit.
3.9.1.
DataNet Site Survey
Fourtec has constructed a Site Survey document to aid all DataNet integrators prior,
during and after every DataNet system installation.
Please contact the Fourtec Help Desk for this document, which includes detailed
instructions on surveying various aspects of the DataNet site prior to deployment to
ensuring there are no RF problems, for example.
Check lists often prove indispensible when certifying the installation – two such lists
are provided below.
Installation Overview Check List
1. Install DataSuite software. Launch in Trial version.
2. Check for software/firmware updates
3. Register software Serial Number (online/offline registration)
4. Connect Receiver to PC USB port and detect Receiver
5. Form New Network
6. Enter SN to Mini DataNet Device Filter
7. Connect DataNet units to network and update firmware (if required)
8. Connect sensors and perform logger Setup
9. Deploy loggers, with optimal RF reception and power supply
10. Review network paths in software
11. Setup alarm levels and notifications
12. Connect modem
13. Setup Report
14. Send Fourtec network screenshot
Post-Installation Check List
1. Formed a new network at the start of installation
2. Network is locked
3. DataSuite software and device firmware are up to date
4. PC is connected to the Internet
5. All units are online with green network paths
6. Configured alarm levels for relevant inputs
40
7. Tested sending of SMS/email notifications
8. GSM Modem is connected with the green online icon
9. At least 2 x DNR900 (one Receiver, one Repeater) to allow Sub Receiver
10. Data files path on PC/network is correct
11. Logger battery readings/AC power supply is stable
12. All online readings are as expected
13. Configured reports to be sent automatically
14. Software SN has been activated
15. Run Application on Windows Startup in Options is selected
16. Sent DataSuite Map View screenshot to Fourtec support for approval
41
Chapter 4:
DataNet Hardware Overview
This chapter details the hardware features of the DataNet system components: the
data loggers and the Receiver/Repeater.
4.1.
Data Logger Front Panel Layout
4.1.1.
DNL910 and DNL920
Apart from the color scheme, the DNL910, DNL920 and PA data logger models have
the same front panel design.
LCD screen
Menu/Enter button
Scroll button
Figure 18: DNL910 data logger front panel
LCD screen
Displays logger status, logger data, and network information.
Menu/Enter button
Use to enter logger menu options and to execute logger commands.
Scroll button
Use to scroll though menu items and to power on unit.
4.1.2.
DNL804, DNL808 and DNL810
The Mini DataNet logger models have the same front panel design.
Multi-function
button
Dual-color
LED indicator
Figure 19: DNL808 data logger front panel
42
Multi-function button: Use to execute logger commands.
Dual–color LED indicator: Indicates status of logger such as joining
network, leaving network, etc.
4.1.3.
DNL804, DNL808 and DNL810-BXT – External
Battery Pack
The Mini DataNet BXT models have the same front panel design.
Multi-function
button
Dual-color
LED indicator
Figure 20: DNL804-BXT data logger front panel
Multi-function button: Use to execute logger commands.
Dual–color LED indicator: Indicates status of logger such as joining
network, leaving network, etc.
4.2.
Data Logger External Connections
4.2.1.
DNL910 and DNL920
External connections of the DNL910, DNL920 and PA models are exactly the same.
Mini USB port
12 V power socket
Negative Center
Four sensor Excitation
inputs
Figure 21: DNL920 data logger external connections
Mini USB Port
To enable data download direct to PC via USB port.
43
12 V Power Socket
To connect logger to external power supply (negative center).
Sensor Inputs
Pluggable screw terminal blocks marked In-1 to In-4 (from left to
right), to connect wide range of sensor types for data acquisition. All
four inputs can be used simultaneously. Sensors can be connected
in any order.
To connect a sensor to the DataNet data logger, unplug the screw
terminal, connect the sensor’s wires to the terminals, and then plug
the terminal back to the corresponding socket on the input block.
Excitation socket
Output power socket used to power external sensors, power derived
directly from the 12V @ 2A external power supply adaptor.
4.2.2.
DNL804 and DNL804-BXT
External
antenna
External Current
4 to 20 mA input
Figure 22: DNL804 and DNL804-BXT data logger external
connections
External antenna: For extended transmission distance of the logger.
External 4 to 20 mA input: Standard input for connecting to sensor
with 4 to 20 mA output.
44
4.2.3.
DNL808 and DNL808-BXT
External
antenna
External NTC 10
KΩ input
External NTC 10
KΩ probe
Figure 23: DNL808 and DNL808-BXT data logger external connections
External antenna: For extended transmission distance of the logger.
External NTC 10KΩ input: Standard input for connecting to NTC probe.
External NTC 10KΩ probe: Fourtec-supplied NTC probe (part of
DNL808 and BXT kit).
4.2.4.
DNL810
The DNL810 doesn’t have any external connections. It has two internal sensors only,
temperature and humidity.
4.3.
DNR800 Mini Repeater Front Panel Layout
Multi-function
button
Dual-color
LED indicator
Figure 24: DNR800 Mini Repeater front panel
Multi-function button: Use to execute logger commands.
Dual–color LED indicator: Indicates status of Repeater such as joining
network, leaving network, etc.
45
4.4.
DNR900 Receiver/Repeater Front Panel
Layout
LCD screen
Menu/Enter button
Scroll button
Figure 25: Receiver/Repeater front panel
LCD screen
Displays Receiver/Repeater status and network information.
Menu/Enter button
Use to enter logger menu options and to execute logger commands.
Scroll button
Use to scroll though menu items and to power on unit.
4.5.
DNR800 Mini Repeater External Connections
Figure 26: Mini Repeater external connections
12 V Power Socket
To connect unit to external power supply. Plug in an AC/DC 9-12 V
adaptor to power the unit. There is no battery supply so when
disconnected from the adapter the unit will shutdown. The adaptor
should meet the required specifications. Refer to ‎Appendix A: DataNet
Specifications.
46
4.6.
DNR900 Receiver/Repeater External
Connections
Mini USB port
12 V power socket
Negative Center
External Alarm
Figure 27: Receiver/Repeater external connections
Mini USB Port
To connect Receiver to PC and be detected by DataSuite software.
Connect the mini USB Type B plug (rectangle plug) of the supplied USB
communication cable to the Receiver and the USB Type A plug (flat
plug) to the computer.
Refer to section ‎4.10.
12 V Power Socket
To connect unit to external power supply. Plug in an AC/DC 9-12 V
adaptor to power the unit. To use as a Receiver or Repeater and
maintain network integrity, the unit should be powered at all times.
Connecting external power to the unit automatically charges the internal
back-up battery. The adaptor should meet the required specifications.
Refer to ‎Appendix A: DataNet Specifications.
External Alarm
Connect external alarm e.g. siren, audible alarm, to this input. Whenever
a logger on the network is in alarm status, the external alarm will be
activated. Refer to section ‎4.7.6 for more details.
4.7.
Data Logger Sensor Overview
This section provides an overview of the hardware specifications of the DataNet data
loggers.
4.7.1.
Internal Sensor Types
The DNL810, DNL910, DNL920, DNL910-PA and DNL920-PA loggers include
internal sensors, depending on the logger model.
Sensor
Digital Humidity
Measurement
Range
5% to 95%
Accuracy
±3% (in DataSuite
software)
±4% (on logger LCD)
47
Logger Model
DNL920
DNL920-PA
DNL810
Sensor
Measurement
Range
Accuracy
Logger Model
DNL810-BXT
Digital Temperature
Temperature PT100
-20 ºC to 50 ºC
-20 ºC to 50 ºC
±0.5 ºC
DNL920
DNL920-PA
±0.4 ºC
DNL810
±0.3 ºC
DNL910
DNL910-PA
4.7.2.
External Sensor Types
DNL910, DNL920 and PA Models
Each of the four input channels of these data logger models are multi-purpose and
can be individually configured to any of the following types and ranges.
Sensor
Measurement
Range
Accuracy
Available Inputs
Current
4 to 20 mA
± 0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
Contact
Open (0) /
Close (1)
N/A
In-1 to In-4
Frequency
20 Hz to 4 KHz
N/A
In-4 only
Pulse Counter
1 to 65,536 pulses
N/A
In-4 only
-200 to -60 ºC ±0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
0 to 4 KHz
Temperature PT100
(2-wire)
-200 to 400 ºC
60 to 400 ºC ±0.5 %
-60 to 60 ºC ±0.3 ˚C
Temperature TC-J
-200 ºC to 1,000 ºC
-200 to -60 ºC ±0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
60 to 1,000 ºC ±0.5 %
-60 to 60 ºC ±0.5 ˚C
Temperature TC-K
-200 ºC to 1,000 ºC
-200 to -60 ºC ±0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
60 to 1,000 ºC ±0.5 %
-60 to 60 ºC ±0.5 ˚C
Temperature TC-T
-200 ºC to 400 ºC
-200 to -60 ºC ±0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
60 to 400 ºC ±0.5 %
-60 to 60 ºC ±0.5 ˚C
Voltage
0 to 1 V
± 0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
Voltage
0 to 50 mV
± 0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
48
DNL804 and DNL804-BXT
Sensor
Current
Measurement
Range
4 to 20 mA
Accuracy
0.5 %
DNL808 and DNL808-BXT
Sensor
Temperature
NTC 10 KΩ
4.7.3.
Measurement
Range
-50 to 150 ºC
Accuracy
-50 to 60 ˚C: ±0.3 ˚C
60 to 150 ˚C: ±0.5 %
Sensor Connection
Connect the sensor/s to the terminal block/s at the top of data logger:
Figure 28: DataNet logger sensor inputs
Sensors do not have to be added successively. You may only configure In-4, or
configure In-1 and In-3, for example, when setting up the logger via the software.
4.7.4.
External PT-100 and NTC Sensor Connection
The polarity of the Fourtec-supplied PT-100 temperature sensor (supporting the
DNL910, DNL920 models) for correct wire-up to the data logger’s terminal blocks is
as follows:

Two red wires are intertwined and connected together to the negative (–) input.

The white wire is connected to the positive (+) input.
The polarity of the NTC Temperature sensor wires (supporting the DNL808-BXT
model) is not an issue when connected to the logger's terminal block. One wire is
connected to each input.
4.7.5.
Programming Limitations for DNL910 and DNL920
The standard sampling rate for all sensors on all inputs is from a maximum of one
sample every second to a minimum of one sample every two hours. However, there
are certain limitations using a specific combination of sensors, which must be taken
into account when programming the DataNet data loggers.
Note: The software integrates all programming limitations automatically when
configuring the loggers.
49
Please refer to the table below for DataNet programming limitations, where:
PT100, Thermocouple J, K or T
=
A
Internal Digital Temperature (on
DNL920)
=
B
Sensor
Combination
3xA
Maximum Sampling Rate
One sample every three seconds
In-1: PT-100
In-2: TC-J
In-3: TC-J
4xA
A+B
(2 x A) + B
Example Setup
One sample every four seconds
Internal: Temp
In-1: TC-T
(3 x A) + B
In-2: PT-100
(4 x A) + B
One sample every five seconds
Internal: Temp
In-1: TC-T
In-2: TC-J
In-3: PT-100
In-4: PT-100
Table 1: Data Logger programming limitations
4.7.6.
External Alarm Output
The DataNet system supports connection of an external alarm e.g. siren, audible
alarm, to the Receiver external alarm input or to In-1 of the DNL910, DNL920 and PA
model data loggers.
When connected to the Receiver, the external alarm will be activated whenever a
logger on the network is in alarm status. When connected to the data logger, the
external alarm will be activated only when that specific logger is in alarm status.
Once there is no alarm status, the external alarm will be deactivated.
Data Logger External Alarm
In-1 of the DNL910, DNL920 and PA models serves either as a standard sensor
input or as an external alarm output. Configure In-1 as Alarm Normally Open or
Alarm Normally Closed in the logger Setup window in the DataSuite software.
Normally Open will result in the alarm being activated during alarm status (the circuit
will be closed).
Normally Closed will result in the alarm being activated when logger is not in alarm
and therefore deactivated when there is an alarm (the circuit will be opened).
Connect In-1 to your external alarm device.
Use the Alarm Setup tab in the Setup dialog to define the logger alarm settings. If
these settings are breached then the alarm will be activated.
50
Receiver External Alarm
By connecting the external alarm to the Ext Alarm input on the Receiver, any alarm
on the entire network will activate the external alarm.
Use the Alarm Setup tab in the Setup dialog to define the logger alarm settings.
Whenever the Receiver receives an alarm status from any logger on the network, the
external alarm will be activated. No additional configuration in the software is
required.
External Alarm Schematic
See the schematic below explaining how to hook up an external alarm to the DataNet
unit.
- +
-
+
Relay
-
+
+
-
3-4 V battery
to power relay
Alarm device
(e.g. siren)
Figure 29: External alarm schematic

+ from DNR900 goes to – of the Relay inputs

+ of Relay input goes to battery that powers the Relay

Load inputs of the Relay go to the Alarm device e.g. siren, lights, etc.

- of the battery goes to – of DNR900.
Note: Maximum load of the Relay is 50 mA, 3 V.
Refer to ‎Appendix A: DataNet Specifications for the full external alarm output
specification.
4.7.7.
Polarity
Current, voltage, thermocouples and user defined sensors have distinct polarity. Be
careful to connect them in the right polarity.
4.7.8.
Frequency/Pulse Counter
Connect the signal wires to In-4 terminal blocks, and select Frequency or Pulse
counter for Input 4 from the logger Setup window in the DataSuite software. Inputs 1
to 3 are still available for other sensors.
51
The Frequency/Pulse counter is optically isolated from the internal circuitry and can
simultaneously measure a signal source, together with another input.
4.7.9.
User Defined Sensors
DataSuite provides a simple and straightforward tool for defining a limited number of
custom sensors. Almost any sensor or transducer with 0 – 1 V or 4 – 20 mA output is
accepted by the DataNet logger and its electrical units are automatically scaled to
meaningful user-defined engineering units.
The sensor definitions are stored in the logger’s memory and are added to the
sensors list. The sensor’s readings are displayed in the user defined units only in the
DataSuite software. Future versions will also support displaying the user defined
engineering units on the logger LCD.
Refer to section ‎17.8.1 for more details.
4.7.10. Sensor Alarms
Via the software, users can define minimum and maximum alarm levels for each
input individually. Users can define pre-low and pre-high alarm levels, for an
additional level of safety in case the logger is approaching an actual breach of alarm.
The DataNet logger display indicates when the sensor reading is in alarm of any
type. The symbols AL-H, AL-L, AL-P-H or AL-P-L are visible next to the
corresponding input readings.
Refer to section ‎0 for more details.
4.7.11. Sensor Calibration
The DataNet data logger is shipped fully calibrated. However, further calibration can
be applied via the DataSuite software. The calibration parameters are sent to the
data loggers wirelessly and stored in the logger’s memory.
Users may calibrate individual input as well as all inputs at once. Calibration settings
may be saved and then loaded into the logger at a later date if the calibration settings
have changed.
Refer to section ‎17.20 for more details.
4.8.
Unit Serial Number and Comment
Every DataNet data logger and Receiver/Repeater unit is embedded with a unique
serial number.
The data logger only can be loaded with a descriptive comment to identify its task
and location. You may add or edit the comment of any logger on the network via the
DataSuite software.
Every time data is transferred to the computer it is labeled both with the logger’s
serial number and comment and is displayed in the graph or data table view.
The unit serial number is also marked on a sticker on the back of the product.
52
4.9.
Power Supply
4.9.1.
DNR900 in Receiver Mode
The Receiver unit is powered via the USB port of the PC, when connected via the
mini USB cable. In addition, the unit can run for a limited time (up to three hours)
from an internal NiMh rechargeable battery. To charge the internal battery, connect
the unit to the AC power supply supplied with the DNR900. The internal battery pack
is generally used as a backup power supply in the event the external power supply
fails.
Note: When in Receiver mode, the unit must be connected to external power at all
times. While running on internal power, the unit will run for only several hours before
shutting down and therefore shutting down the DataNet network which the Receiver
is managing.
4.9.2.
DNR800 and DNR900 in Repeater Mode
The DNR800 must be connected to external AC power at all times. This device does
not have an internal battery so when the external power supply is disconnected the
unit will shutdown.
When in Repeater mode, the DNR900 must be connected to external AC power at all
times using the supplied AC charger. Otherwise, when the internal backup batteries
drains and shuts down the unit, all the end units dependent on the Repeater to
transmit to the Receiver, will not be detected by the software. The user won’t be able
to monitor data readings from these units until the Repeater comes back online.
When connected to external power supply, the Repeater battery will not be charged
when the unit is turned off. This will allow the system to protect the battery from
overheating.
4.9.3.
DNL910 and DNL920 Data Loggers
The DNL910, DNL920 and PA data loggers run from an internal NiMh rechargeable
battery as well as from external AC power supply.
Note: The PA (power amplifier) models must be connected to AC power at all times
due to the high power consumption of these units.
Depending on the logger configuration, from a fully charged battery, the non-PA data
logger can run for up to several months. Refer to section ‎4.9.7 for more details on
battery life.
Note: Charge the data logger units for 16 hours before using them for the first time.
When connected to external power supply, the data logger battery will not be
charged when the unit is turned off. This will allow the system to protect the battery
from overheating.
First Time Charging
From a fully drained battery, you must charge the battery for 16 hours to bring it to a
full charge. Once the charge cycle is complete, the logger will run from the external
power supply, without draining (or charging) the internal battery. In order to maintain
53
a fully charged battery and ensure the battery doesn’t self-discharge, the battery
charger will daily charge the unit for a minute to maintain the battery capacity.
Note: Before storing the DataNet units make sure you have unplugged all the
sensors and turned the units off via the keypad.
Standard Charging
When a logger is reconnected to the AC charger it will begin the 16-hour charge
cycle, no matter what the status of the battery. Once the charging cycle is complete
the logger will run from external power supply.
The one exception to this scenario is if the charger is reconnected within an hour of
disconnection and the battery level is at least 90%. In this situation the charging
process will not restart.
Effect of Charging Battery on Temperature Sensor
For loggers measuring data with the internal temperature sensor, it is critical to note
that during the charge cycle the logger will heat up thereby causing the internal
temperature sensor reading to rise by up to 10 ˚C above ambient temperature. Once
the charging process is complete, the logger will cool down and the internal
temperature sensor readings will return to normal.
For loggers remaining connected to AC power, to prevent the logger from heating up
again following the initial charge cycle, the logger will receive a one minute trickle
charge each day rather than stay continually charged. This is sufficient to ensure the
logger doesn’t self-discharge and will maintain the logger’s full charge status.
4.9.4.
Mini DataNet DNL8XX-BXT Data Loggers
The Mini DataNet loggers are powered by non-rechargeable internal 2/3 AA lithium
batteries. There is no external power supply for these loggers.
Depending on the logger configuration, the battery can last up to 10 months before
they need to be replaced.
Replacing the Mini DataNet Battery
To replace the batteries on the Mini DataNet loggers, follow these instructions:
1. Stop the unit from the DataSuite software.
2. Turn off the unit using the logger button.
3. Remove the two screws located on the top panel of the logger (where the
antenna is connected) and with care pull out the internal compartment containing
the logger circuit board and battery.
4. Remove and replace the battery, ensuring the correct polarity of the battery.
5. Push the internal compartment back into place.
6. Secure the panel with the two screws.
Note: With the DNL808 also disconnect the external sensor to avoid damaging it.
4.9.5.
Mini DataNet DNL8XX Data Loggers
The Mini DataNet Extended Battery Pack includes a modified plastic casing for the
three existing Mini DataNet models. This new casing features a battery pack
supporting up to 4 x AA 3.6 V batteries, for extending the logger’s battery life.
Functionality of this design is no different than the standard loggers.
54
With all 4 batteries connected, battery life of up to 3 years, depending on sampling
and transmission rates is expected.
There is no external power supply for these loggers.
Note: 2 batteries are supplied with every order of a BXT model.
Replacing the Mini DataNet BXT Battery
To replace the batteries on the Mini DataNet loggers, follow these instructions:
1. Stop the unit from the DataSuite software.
2. Turn off the unit using the logger button.
3. Remove the screw located on the battery case panel at the bottom of the logger
and open the panel to expose the battery pack.
4. Remove the battery pack taking care not to pull the wires out of place, and
replace the batteries, ensuring the correct polarity of the battery.
5. Push the battery pack back into place.
6. Secure the panel with one screw.
4.9.6.
Power Adapter
The DataNet power adapter is used to power the DNR800, DNR900, DNL910,
DNL920 and PA model units. The mains adaptor (AC/DC adaptor) converts mains
power (from a wall outlet) to a voltage suitable to the DataNet hardware unit.

Output: Capacitor filtered 9 to 12 VDC, 300 mA

Female plug, center negative
Note: Only use Fourtec-supplied power adapters to avoid damaging the units with
incorrect power supply.
4.9.7.
Data Logger Battery Life
Battery life depends on the logger sampling rate, transmission rate, type of sensor,
network architecture and number of measured sensors.

DNL910 and DNL920 can last up to six months on a charged battery.

DNL8XX can last up to 10 months on a new battery.

DNL8XX-BXT can last up to 3 years with all four batteries connected.
The table below provides some example scenarios of standard logger configurations
and expected battery life.
55
Logger
Model
Sensor Setup
DNL910 
Sample
Rate
Transmission
Rate
Battery
Life
15 minutes
15 minutes
Five
months
DNL910 1 x PT-100
15 minutes
15 minutes
Six months
DNL808 1 x NTC 10 KΩ
15 minutes
15 minutes
10 months
DNL810 
15 minutes
15 minutes
10 months


Internal Temperature
4 x Thermocouple
Internal Temperature
Internal Humidity
Table 2: Data logger battery life scenarios
4.10.
USB Communication Cable
A mini USB communication cable is supplied as part of the DataSuite software kit.
This cable has the following roles:

To connect the Receiver to the DataSuite PC workstation, allowing the Receiver
to communicate with the DataSuite software and manage the DataNet network.

To power the Receiver when connected to the PC (the internal battery is not
charged).

To enable data download directly via USB for DNL910, DNL920 and PA model
loggers.

To enable firmware update directly via USB for DNL910, DNL920 and PA model
loggers as well as DNR900.

To enable shutdown directly via USB of DNL910, DNL920 and PA model loggers.
Note: The USB driver is installed as part of the software installation process. Without
this driver the PC won’t detect the Receiver. To avoid compatibility problems do not
connect the Receiver to the PC before installing the USB driver.
Type B plug
Connect to PC USB port
Type A plug
Connect to device USB port
Figure 30: USB communication cable
4.11.
DataNet Keypad Overview
Note: Explanations for DNL units also apply to the PA models
4.11.1. DNL910, DNL920 and DNR900 Keypad
The DNL910, DNL920 and DNR900 units each have two buttons on the keypad,
used to navigate through the LCD menu options, as well as turn on the units.
Refer to section ‎4.12 to learn how to operate the data loggers and sections ‎4.13 and
‎4.15 to learn how to operate the Receiver and Repeater.
56
The Menu button
has two functionalities:
Navigate to the main menu. When pressed from
within a submenu, the display will take you back to the
main menu.
Selecting an option from one of the menus. When
pressed on one of the main menu items, it will take you
to the sub menu options.
The Scroll button
has two functionalities:

When the unit is off, pressing this button will power
the unit on.

Scrolls through the menu options.
4.11.2. DNL8XX and DNL8XX-BXT Keypad
The Mini DataNet units have one button on the keypad. This
button is multi-functional and is used to perform various
functions such as:

Turning on/off the unit

Starting signal test

Leaving the network

Locating device icon in software Map View
Refer to section ‎4.13 to learn how to operate the Mini DataNet
and Mini Repeater devices.
4.12.
Operating the DNL910 and DNL920
This section explains how to operate the DNL910, DNL920 and PA model loggers
and provides an overview of the menu options on the units’ LCD screen.
4.12.1. Turning on the Unit
In order to view the logger menu options, the unit must be powered on by pressing
the Scroll button
the AC adapter.
on the keypad. Ensure the logger is charged or connected to
Once the unit is switched on it will emit a short beep and the screen will read Search
Parent until the Parent unit e.g. Receiver, is detected. A welcome message is the
displayed:
Fourtec DataNet
Ready
T
57
4.12.2. Display Shutdown
When the data logger is running from batteries only, if the screen is inactive for thirty
seconds it will turn off. However the logger will continue to operate in the
background. Press the Scroll button to enable the LCD screen again. The screen will
not turn off during firmware upgrade.
When connected to external power supply the logger screen will always stay on.
4.12.3. Joining a Network
When a logger is powered on or reset, it will automatically scan for a network after
the welcome message has appeared.
There are four scenarios that can occur while scanning for a network:
Scenario 1: The unit can’t find the last network that it was connected to. For
example, the logger is a new unit which was never previously joined a network.
Scenario 2: The unit scans and finds the last network it was connected to, and joins
that network.
Scenario 3: The unit can’t find any networks at all.
Scenario 4: The unit found a network but failed to join.
Read below for more details on each scenario.
Scenario 1
If the unit can’t find the last network that it was connected to (for example, it’s a new
unit), the unit will display all the networks that are in range:
Scan for network
Scan for network
Found # network
Where # is the number of networks found
Once the scan has been completed the following screen appears:
Scan complete
T
Type A plug
T
If more than one network was found, the user will need to select the network ID that
he wants to connect to. The user uses the Scroll button to scroll through the Network
IDs. The relevant network is selected using the Enter button.
Network 1:
ID: 014.061.082
Network 2:
ID: 021.207.175
Rescan networks
T
T the following screen will be displayed.
Once the network has been selected
Joined network:
ID: 021.207.175
T
58
T
T
To rescan the networks, simply select the Rescan Networks option and the logger
will start the scanning process again.
If only one network was found the system will automatically connect to that network
without the user needing to select the network manually.
Scan for network
Found 1 network
Scan complete
Joined to network:
ID: 021.207.175
The logger display will return to the welcome message, which consists of the logger
name (editable via the software) and the network status:

Ready - If connection to the DataSuite software is established.

Software is down - If established connection to the Receiver but the DataSuite
software is down (PC is off, software is not open, etc.)

No Parent Signal – The parent unit, either the Receiver or Repeater, is not
detected by the logger therefore the logger is not transmitting its data to the
network.
fourtec DataNet
Ready
fourtec DataNet
Software is down
fourtec DataNet
No Parent Signal
The logger will continue to search for the parent unit (at specific intervals) and the
screen will continue to read Search Parent until the parent is found.
Scenario 2
When the unit scans for networks and finds the last network that it was connected to
it will automatically connect to the last known network.
Joined Network:
ID: 021.207.175
As in Scenario 1, the logger display will then return to the welcome message
displaying the unit name and status.
Scenario 3
The system can’t find any networks at all.
If no networks were found, the unit will display the following screens.
Scan for network
Found 0 network
Scan complete
59
No found networks:
Rescan networks
Scenario 4
The unit found a network but failed to join.
The unit will perform up to 99 retries to join the network before scanning for networks
again. Press any of the unit buttons to cease the attempts to join the network.
A unit may fail to join a network if it is far from the Receiver, requiring several hops to
reach the Receiver, or the network itself is large with many units. The attempt to join
a network is made in under a second in real-time and on high traffic network, it may
result in failure to join.
Moving the unit closer to the Receiver can help the logger to join successfully. If the
logger still can’t join, form a new network or contact Fourtec technical support.
4.12.4. Main Menu Options
There are three menu categories on the data logger:

View Data

Status
Note: If the unit is not in Run mode only the Status menu options will be available.
Press the Menu button to reach the main menu display. Scroll through the main
menu options (View Data, Status) using the Scroll button. Once you reach the main
menu option you need, press Enter to select that option and enter the sub menus.
View Data Menu
View Data
Note: View Data is the default page when the unit is running.
If there is more than one sensor running, the screen will auto scroll between the
sensors showing the sensor name and senor value. These are real-time displays.
The display will switch back to the View Data screen after five minutes if none of
logger buttons have been pressed.
If the sensor breached any of the predefined alarm levels, then the alarm symbol will
be displayed alongside the data reading.
For example:
In-TMP
24˚C
AL-Lo
The logger display alarm symbols are:

AL-HI : Alarm High

AL-Lo : Alarm Low

AL-P-H : Pre Alarm High

AL-P-L : Pre Alarm Low
60
Status Menu
Status
The Status menu contains the following sub menus, all reachable by using the Scroll
button.
The sub menus are outlined below in the order in which they appear on the logger
display.
Name and Status
As explained previously, the unit name (or Comment) is displayed on the first row
and the second row indicates the logger status.
If the logger is running, then the following screen is displayed.
Fourtec DataNet
Logger running
Mark Unit on PC
To indicate the logger icon in the software’s Map View, press the Enter button when
this screen is displayed. The logger’s icon located in the Map View will blink a
number of times.
Batt Level (battery level)
If the power adapter is not connected the battery percentage will be displayed.
If the power adapter is connected Battery charging will be displayed.
Batt Level:
67%
Batt Level:
Battery charging
Signal Level Test
The Signal Level test allows the user to check the signal strength and quality of the
link between the logger and its parent unit. This test is used to determine optimal
positioning of the logger during deployment.
Signal level:
Run test -> Menu
By spressing the Menu button the unit will show the signal level and link quality in
percentage terms.
If there is no connection with a parent unit, an Out of range message will be
displayed.
Signal level: 80
Link quality: 95
Out of range
61

Signal level: Indicates the reception level between end unit and parent unit. If the
level falls below 20% then the logger should be placed in a better location or a
Repeater should be added.

Link quality: Calculation of the data transmitted with no errors from the logger to
the parent unit. If the level falls between 85% then the logger should be placed in
a better location or a Repeater should be added. The lower the link quality %, the
more retries are needed in order for the logger to send all of its data.
Note: The signal level may be low but the link quality can still be 100%.
You will not be able to run the Signal Level test when the logger has lost its
connection to the network. If you tried, then the following screens are displayed:
No Parent signal
Fourtec DataNet
No Parent found
Firmware Version
This menu informs the user of the logger firmware version. This is helpful when you
need to upgrade the system firmware, to check the current version. Or when
contacting Fourtec technical support, with any technical issues.
Firmware version:
2.03.04.02.30.00
s firmware version is commonly referred to by the numbers in bold in the screen
The
above. For example, the firmware version which is supported by this user guide is
v2.30.
S/N
This menu displays the unit’s eight digit SN.
S/N 12345678
Network Data
This menu displays the unique network ID to which the unit is currently connected.
This ID will match the network ID displayed in the software in the Receiver icon’s
tooltip in the Map View.
Network data:
ID: 014.061.082
s
Device
Mode
There are two possible device modes:

Logger
Device is operating as standard data logger

Logger – Repeater
62
Device is operating as a Short Range Repeater. Refer to section ‎3.8.5 for more
details.
Leave Network
If this option is selected, the unit will first leave the network and then reset itself. The
scan network procedure described in section ‎4.12.3 will begin. The only exception to
this procedure is that even if the last connected network is found during the scan, the
unit will not automatically connect to it.
Leave network
Note: If the logger was in Run mode prior to sending the Leave Network command
the software will download all data from the unit first and then force it to leave the
network.
Reset Unit
When the unit is reset, upon start up it will automatically scan for networks. The unit
will automatically connect to the previously connected network assuming it was found
in the network scan.
Following reset the unit will continue to operate according to its last set up instruction.
For example, if the logger was in Run mode, then after reset it will continue to run
and record data.
Turn Off Unit
Selecting this option will shut the unit down. You can turn the unit on again by
pressing the Scroll button.
It is recommended to turn off the unit when it is not in use.
Turn off unit
Note: Turning off the logger when in Short Range Repeater mode can have adverse
affects on your network, as other units may be dependent on the Repeater for
transmitting its data to the Receiver. To prevent the SRR from being a point of failure
if shut off, ensure the network is robust enough by having alternative routes for the
end units to reach the Receiver.
4.12.5. Additional Logger Screens
Unit Beep
When the DataSuite software activates the Call Unit feature, the logger will beep and
the following screen will be displayed:
Unit Beep
Fourtec DataNet
Refer to section ‎17.16.5 for more details.
63
No Parent Signal
When a logger’s parent unit, such as a Repeater or Receiver, goes offline then the
following screen is immediately displayed on the logger:
No Parent signal
For example, this could happen if the Receiver managing the network has formed a
new network, so there is no Receiver managing the previous network. Or if the
parent unit is a Repeater, and it goes offline, then the logger will display this
message.
Once it has determined that the parent signal is lost, it will try to establish a
connection with the network via another Repeater but if it fails then the following
screen is displayed:
Fourtec DataNet
No Parent found
You will have to leave the network and rescan for a new network.
Loading Firmware
When updating the firmware of the data logger via the software’s Firmware Update
Center, the logger screen will display the update progress. When complete the main
logger status screen will be displayed.
Also refer to ‎Chapter 18: Updating DataSuite Software and Firmware.
Loading firmware
Progress: 55%
Note: Logger must be in Stop mode before firmware can be updated.
64
4.13.
Operating the Mini DataNet DNL8XX,
DNL8XX-BXT and DNR800
This section explains how to operate the DNL804, DNL808, DNL810, DNL8XX-BXT
and DNR800 Mini DataNet units using the multi-functional button on the logger front
panel. There is no LCD screen on the Mini DataNet models.
Ensure the device Serial Number has been added to the Mini DataNet Device Filter
before continuing. Refer to section ‎3.5.3.
A useful tip for remembering the LED functionality is that a green LED indicates a
logger turning on or joining a network, and a red LED indicates a logger is shutting
down or leaving a network.
4.13.1. Turning Mini DataNet Units Off
DNL8XX and DNL8XX-BXT
To conserve battery, the Mini DataNet LED does not provide an indication of on/off
status. If you wish to operate the logger it is best to first be sure the unit is turned off
before continuing. Turning off the unit does not remove it from the network.
To turn the unit off:
1. Press and hold the logger button until the LED emits a fixed, red light for at least
three seconds.
2. Release the logger button.
DNR800
The DNR800 Mini Repeater is powered by external AC power supply only. There is
no battery backup. When disconnected the unit is shutdown immediately and is
disconnected from the network.
4.13.2. Turning Mini DataNet Units On and Joining a
Network
DNL8XX and DNL8XX-BXT
The action of turning on a unit means that it will also try to join an existing network.
When the unit is off:
1. Give the logger button a short press.
2. The logger will search for a network. The LED will blink green at one second
intervals until either of the following two scenarios occurs:
 The logger automatically finds a network. The LED will be fixed green for
five seconds and the logger icon will display and blink for eight seconds in the
software Map View.
The logger will connect to the first network it finds.
65
 The logger doesn't find a network. After 60 seconds of failed attempts to
find a network, the logger will shut down.
Note: The logger won’t find a network if its serial network wasn’t entered in
the Device Filter (if the filter is enabled), the Receiver isn’t online or if the
network is locked (right-click on the Receiver menu to unlock).
3. Once the logger has joined the network you may configure it to start recording
data. Refer to section ‎17.17.
DNR800
The DNR800 functionality for joining a network is the same as for the other Mini
DataNet units. The only difference is that to turn on the Mini Repeater, you can also
just connect the unit to its external power supply. When turned on it will automatically
search for networks.
4.13.3. Rescanning for Networks
If the unit has joined another network i.e. not yours, then you will have to leave that
network and rescan for new networks. This requires first shutting off the unit and then
leaving the current network.
1. Make sure the unit serial number is entered into the Mini DataNet Device Filter.
2. Turn the unit off by pressing and holding the unit button until the LED emits a
fixed, red light for at least three seconds.
3. Release the unit button.
4. To leave the network, press the unit button again for three seconds. The LED will
blink red three times to indicate Leave Network command has been received.
The unit icon will be removed from the software Map View.
5. To rescan for network, give the unit button a short press. The unit will search for a
network and will indicate it has joined a network by emitting a solid green LED for
five seconds.
Note: If there are multiple DataNet networks in your environment make sure that the
unit SN is listed in the Device Filter of only one of these networks, otherwise you
can’t control which network it will join first and you will have to rescan the networks
several times.
4.13.4. Leave Network
To leave the current network, when the unit is on:
1. Press and hold the unit button until the LED emits a fixed, red light for at least
three seconds.
2. Release the unit button.
3. To leave the network, press the unit button again for three seconds. The LED will
blink red three times to indicate Leave Network command has been received.
The unit icon will be removed from the software Map View. The unit is now off.
4.13.5. Running Signal Test
You may run a signal test on the logger or Mini Repeater to check the signal strength
to the parent unit.
66
Right-click the unit icon on the Map View and select the Signal Test option. The
signal test will be performed on the unit with the following parameters indicating
signal quality:
 Good: LED blinks orange at for 0.5 second intervals
 Low: LED blinks orange at one second intervals
 Unit is out of range: LED emits steady orange light
Note: Power consumption of logger battery during signal test increases significantly
so do not overuse this feature.
4.13.6. Call Unit from Software
To locate the unit via the software, right-click the unit icon on the Map View and
select the Call Device (LED) option. The unit LED will alternate between slow green
and red blinks and after several blinks it will stop.
4.14.
Operating the DNR900 in Receiver Mode
This section explains how to operate the Receiver using the menu options on the
units’ LCD screen, as how to change the DNR900 unit type from Receiver to
Repeater.
4.14.1. Turning on the Unit
In order to view the Receiver menu options, the unit must be turned on by pressing
the Scroll button
AC adapter.
on the keypad. Ensure the unit is charged or connected to the
Once the unit is turned on it will display a series of status messages, finishing with
the welcome screen below:
Receiver
ID: 021.180.012
4.14.2. Receiver Menus
T the unit is selected to work as a Receiver (as opposed to working as a
When
Repeater) the following menus are displayed on the unit.
Network Name and ID
When the unit is switched on the following screen is displayed, indicating the default
network name and the unique network ID formed by this Receiver. The network
name can be changed via the DataSuite software.
DataNet Network
T
ID: 021.180.012
T
67
Receiver version
This menu informs the user of the Receiver firmware version. This is helpful when
you need to upgrade the system firmware, to check the current version. Or when
contacting Fourtec technical support, with any technical issues.
Reset Unit
When the unit is reset, upon start up it will reconnect the network it previously formed
and managed.
Reset unit
Turn Off Unit
Selecting this option will shut the unit down. You can turn the unit on again by
pressing the Scroll button. When the Receiver is shutdown the network will be down
as well, as the end units won’t be able to transmit to the Receiver.
Turn off unit
It is recommended to turn off the unit when it is not in use.
4.14.3. Changing Receiver to Repeater
For users of DNR900 firmware 2.45 and higher, use the DataSuite software to
change the DNR900 from Receiver mode to Repeater mode. Refer to section ‎17.16
for more details.
For users of firmware versions lower than 2.45, follow the instructions below.
Scroll through the Receiver menu until you reach the menu Change Unit Type to
Repeater.
Change unit type
to Repeater
Press the Enter button to proceed with changing the unit to Repeater mode. Once
you perform this action, any network the unit may have formed while in Receiver
mode will be down, and you will need to form a new network with another Receiver
unit, and join your existing loggers to that new network.
Note: Once you change the Receiver to a Repeater, you will only be able to
download data from loggers on the Receiver’s network via direct USB connection or
by using the Substitute Receiver feature (see section ‎4.15.6).
Once the unit is in Repeater mode, you will need to leave the network it is connected
to, and scan for a new network. Only once the Repeater joins the network will other
units on that network detect it.
Refer to section ‎4.15 for more details on operating a Repeater and joining a new
network.
68
4.14.4. Additional Receiver Screens
Loading Firmware
When updating the firmware of the Receiver via the software’s Firmware Update
Center, the Receiver screen will display the update progress. When complete the
main Receiver status screen will be displayed.
Loading firmware
Progress: 55%
4.15.
Operating the DNR900 in Repeater Mode
This section explains how to operate the Repeater and provides an overview of the
menu options on the units’ LCD screen.
Refer to section ‎4.14.3 to learn how to switch the DNR900 from Receiver to Repeater
mode.
4.15.1. Turning on the Unit
In order to view the Repeater menu options, the unit must be turned on by pressing
the Scroll button
on the keypad. Ensure the unit is connected to the AC
adapter.
Once the unit is switched on it will emit a short beep and the screen will display a
welcome message:
Fourtec DataNet
Ready
4.15.2. Display Shutdown
When the Repeater is running from batteries only, if the screen is inactive for thirty
seconds
it will turn off. However the Repeater will continue to operate in the
T
background. Press the Scroll button to enable the LCD screen again. The screen will
not turn off during firmware upgrade.
When connected to external power supply the Repeater screen will always stay on.
4.15.3. Joining a Network
When
T a Repeater is powered on or reset, it will automatically scan for a network after
the welcome message has appeared.
There are four scenarios that can occur while scanning for a network:
Scenario 1: The unit can’t find the last network that it was connected to. For
example, the Repeater is a new unit which was never previously joined a network.
Scenario 2: The unit scans and finds the last network it was connected to, and joins
that network.
T
Scenario
3: The unit can’t find any networks at all.
69
Scenario 4: The unit found a network but failed to join.
Read below for more details on each scenario.
Scenario 1
If the unit can’t find the last network that it was connected to (for example, it’s a new
unit), the unit will display all the networks that are in range:
Scan for network
Scan for network
Found # network
Where # is the number of networks found
T
Once the scan has been completed the following screen appears:
Scan complete
T
If more than one network was found, the user will need to select the network ID that
he Twants to connect to. The user uses the Scroll button to scroll through the Network
IDs. The relevant network is selected using the Enter button.
T
Network 1:
ID: 014.061.082
Network 2:
ID: 021.207.175
Rescan networks
Once the network has been selected the following screen will be displayed.
T
Joined network:
T
ID: 021.207.175
To rescan the networks, simply select the Rescan Networks option and the logger
willTstart the scanning process again.
Type A plug
T
If only one network was found the system will automatically connect to that network
without the user needing to select the network manually.
T
Scan for network
Found 1 network
Scan complete
Joined to network:
ID: 021.207.175
The Repeater display will return to the welcome message, which consists of the
Repeater name (editable via the software) and the network status:
Ready - If connection to the DataSuite
T software is established.
T
Software is down - If established connection to the Receiver but the DataSuite
T
software
is down (PC is off, software is not open, etc.)
No Parent Signal – The parent unit, either the Receiver or another Repeater, is not
detected by the Repeater therefore it is not transmitting its data to the network.
70
T
T
T
fourtec DataNet
Ready
fourtec DataNet
Software is down
fourtec DataNet
No Parent Signal
The Repeater will continue to search for the parent unit (at specific intervals) and the
screen will continue to read Search Parent until the parent is found.
Scenario 2
When the system scans for networks and finds the last network that it was connected
to it will automatically connect to the last known network.
Joined Network:
ID: 021.207.175
As in Scenario 1, the logger display will then return to the welcome message
displaying the unit name and status.
Scenario 3
The system can’t find any networks at all.
If no networks were found, the unit will display the following screens.
Scan for network
Found 0 network
Scan complete
No found networks:
Rescan networks
Scenario 4
The unit found a network but failed to join.
The unit will perform up to 99 retries to join the network before scanning for networks
again. Press any of the unit buttons to cease the attempts to join the network.
A unit may fail to join a network if it is far from the Receiver, requiring several hops to
reach the Receiver, or the network itself is large with many units. The attempt to join
a network is made in under a second in real-time and on high traffic network, it may
result in failure to join.
Moving the unit closer to the Receiver can help the logger to join successfully. If the
logger still can’t join, form a new network or contact Fourtec technical support.
4.15.4.
Menu Options
Use the Scroll button to scroll through the menu options.
Name and Status
The unit name is displayed on the first row and the second row indicates the
Repeater status.
Fourtec DataNet
Ready
71
Mark Unit on PC
To indicate the Repeater icon in the software’s Map View, press the Enter button
when this screen is displayed. The Repeater’s icon located in the Map View will blink
a number of times.
Batt Level (battery level)

If the power adapter is not connected the battery percentage will be displayed.

If the power adapter is connected Battery charging will be displayed.
Batt Level:
67%
Batt Level:
Battery charging
Signal Level Test
The Signal Level test allows the user to check the signal strength and quality of the
link between the Repeater and its parent unit. This test is used to determine optimal
positioning of the Repeater during deployment.
Signal level:
Run test -> Menu
By spressing the Menu button the unit will show the signal level and link quality in
percentage terms.
If there is no connection with a parent unit, an Out of range message will be
displayed.
Signal level: 80
Link quality: 95
Out of range

Signal level: Indicates the reception level between end unit and parent unit. If the
level falls below 20% then the logger should be placed in a better location or
another Repeater should be added.

Link quality: Calculation of the data transmitted with no errors from the Repeater
to the parent unit. If the level falls between 85% then the Repeater should be
placed in a better location or another Repeater should be added. The lower the
link quality %, the more retries are needed in order for the Repeater to send all of
its data.
Note: The signal level may be low but the link quality can still be 100%.
You will not be able to run the Signal Level test when the Repeater has lost its
connection to the network. If you tried, then the following screens are displayed:
No Parent signal
Fourtec DataNet
No Parent found
72
Firmware Version
This menu informs the user of the Repeater firmware version. This is helpful when
you need to upgrade the system firmware, to check the current version. Or when
contacting Fourtec technical support, with any technical issues.
Firmware version:
1.03.01.02.30.00
s firmware version is commonly referred to by the numbers in bold in the screen
The
above. For example, the firmware version which is supported by this user guide is
v2.30.
S/N
This menu displays the unit’s eight digit SN.
S/N 12345678
Network Data
This menu displays the unique network ID to which the unit is currently connected.
This ID will match the network ID displayed in the software in the Receiver icon’s
tooltip in the Map View.
Network data:
ID: 014.061.082
s
Go to Substitute Receiver Mode
Refer to section ‎4.15.6 for more details.
Change Unit Type to Receiver
Select this option to change your unit from Repeater to Receiver mode. A new
network ID will be formed.
Change unit type
to Receiver
Press the Enter button to proceed with changing the unit to Receiver mode.
Leave Network
If this option is selected, the unit will first leave the network and then reset itself. The
scan network procedure described in section ‎4.12.3 will begin. The only exception to
this procedure is that even if the last connected network is found during the scan, the
unit will not automatically connect to it.
Leave network
73
Reset Unit
When the unit is reset, upon start up it will automatically scan for networks. The unit
will automatically connect to the previously connected network assuming it was found
in the network scan.
Turn Off Unit
Selecting this option will shut the unit down. You can turn the unit on again by
pressing the Scroll button.
It is recommended to turn off the unit when it is not in use.
Turn off unit
Note: Turning off the Repeater can have adverse affects on your network, as other
units may be dependent on the Repeater for transmitting its data to the Receiver. To
prevent the Repeater from being a point of failure if shut off, ensure the network is
robust enough by having alternative routes for the end units to reach the Receiver.
4.15.5. Additional Repeater Screens
Unit Beep
When the DataSuite software activates the Call Unit feature, the Repeater will beep
and the following screen will be displayed:
Unit Beep
Fourtec DataNet
Refer to section ‎17.16.5 for more details.
No Parent Signal/No Parent Found
When a Repeater’s parent unit, such as another Repeater or the Receiver, goes
offline then the following screen is immediately displayed on the logger:
No Parent signal
For example, this could happen if the Receiver managing the network has formed a
new network, so there is no Receiver managing the previous network. Or if the
parent unit is a Repeater, and it goes offline, then this Repeater will display the
message above.
Once it has determined that the parent signal is lost, it will try to establish a
connection with the network via another Repeater but if it fails then the following
screen is displayed:
Fourtec
No Parent found
You will have to leave the current network and rescan for a new network.
74
Loading Firmware
When updating the firmware of the Repeater via the software’s Firmware Update
Center, the Repeater screen will display the update progress. When complete the
main Repeater screen will be displayed.
Loading firmware
Progress: 55%
4.15.6. Working in Substitute Receiver Mode
In the event that the network Receiver suffers hardware failure, is damaged or cannot
operate for any reason, the DataNet network cannot function as an online monitoring
system.
In such an event any network with a functioning Repeater can restore network
functionality i.e. transmission of data from logger to software, by using the Repeater
to temporarily replace the Receiver.
By doing so, the Repeater will be defined as a Substitute Receiver, maintaining the
original network ID, and full Receiver functionality except for the ability to add new
loggers to the network. Until a new, permanent Receiver is obtained, this feature
provides an excellent backup enabling continuous data transfer preventing the time
consuming task of moving all devices to a new network.
To enable Substitute Receiver mode:
1. Ensure the original network Receiver is switched off.
2. Connect the Repeater to the PC via mini-USB cable.
3. From the Repeater menu, select Go to Substitute Receiver mode.
4. The LCD screen will display Sub Receiver and the network ID. To move to
standard Repeater mode, select Change unit type to Repeater from the menu.
4.16.
Data Logger Memory Management
All DataNet data loggers operate using a cyclic memory mechanism. When the
logger memory is full, the logger will not stop recording data. It will continue by writing
over the first samples recorded to the logger memory.
As DataNet is an online monitoring system, the logger data is regularly transmitted to
the Receiver, so any erased samples will already be safely recorded to the DataNet
data file folders.
The only scenario where data may be erased is if the Receiver is offline for a period
longer than the data logger’s Recording Time (as displayed in the Setup dialog). The
Recording Time indicates how long the logger can record data for until the memory is
full. In this case, the logger memory will fill up and due to the cyclic mechanism, start
erasing the first recorded samples. Any samples not transmitted to the computer will
be permanently lost. It must be noted that this scenario is highly unlikely.
75
Chapter 5:
DaqLink Overview
This chapter provides a general overview of the DaqLink system.
5.1.
DaqLink Introduction
Standalone logger measuring up to 6 channels
With built-in temperature and humidity sensors, plus four external probe inputs the
DaqLink standalone data logger ensures a low cost, reliable and accurate solution.
The DaqLink logger is a 16-bit, mobile data acquisition device for continuous indoor
or outdoor data monitoring.
The DaqLink system is comprised of two data logger models, measuring a broad
range of parameters on four external inputs for direct measurement and recording of
PT-100, thermocouple, 0 to 1 V, 4 to 20 mA, contact, frequency and pulse sensors,
as well as internal temperature and relative humidity sensors.
With its high resolution and fast Analog to Digital converter (ADC), DaqLink data
loggers meet the majority of data acquisition requirements in most industrial
applications. Every DaqLink logger unit is embedded with a unique serial number and
can be loaded with a descriptive comment for safe identification. An internal clock
and calendar keeps track of the time and date of every sample measured.
DaqLink loggers can automatically activate external alarm events when data is
outside a specified range. Email and SMS notifications can be sent to predefined
contacts.
The DaqLink system is powered by the powerful DataSuite software. The Windows
 based software is the central management interface of the DaqLink network.
When connected via USB cable to the PC, DaqLink data can be monitored online
and displayed in real-time graphs or tables. Analyze data with various mathematical
tools, or export data to a spreadsheet.
The software also enables you to configure, calibrate or update the firmware of
DaqLink units via direct USB connection.
Key DaqLink benefits include:

Real-time logging - Online operation with data results on screen

Independence - Manual or PC operation with on-site monitoring via two-row LCD
display

Intuitively - Simple keypad and easy-to-navigate menus

Long life - Low-power consumption and rechargeable battery lasting up to six
months

Flexibility - Four alarm levels with visual LCD, and audible alarms

Non-stop logging - Continuous data storage to large onboard memory and
periodic USB downloads
76
5.2.
The DaqLink System
The basic DaqLink system contains at least one of the following units:

DaqLink data logger – Part Number DBSA710 or DBSA720

Mini-USB communication cable

Power adapter (one per DaqLink unit ordered)

DataSuite software CD containing user guide
5.2.1.
The Data Logger
There are two data logger models compatible with the DaqLink system. These
loggers support up to four external sensors and two internal sensors, temperature
and humidity, depending on the specific model. Data is recorded and stored to the
logger’s internal memory and transmitted over the network to the DataSuite software
running on the PC.
The data logger is programmed to consume as little power as possible during
operation, in order to conserve the battery life. When not transmitting or recording
data the units are in sleep mode and they wake up when needed.
The battery for the DBSA710 and DBSA720 is rechargeable and can run up to
several months on one charge, depending on the logger configuration.
Refer to section ‎4.9.7 for more information.
Note: Battery life depends on the logger sampling rate, transmission rate, type of
sensor, and number of measured sensors.
DaqLink Data Loggers
Part Number: DBSA720
Part Number: DBSA710
Four external channel data logger with
two internal sensors, Humidity and
Temperature
Four external channel data logger with
internal Temperature sensor
Memory Capacity: ~59,000 samples
Memory Capacity: ~59,000 samples
Power supply: AC or battery operated
Power supply: AC or battery operated
77
5.2.2.
Hardware Accessories
The DaqLink system includes the following accessories:

Mini-USB cable for connecting data logger to PC

Power adapter to power the data logger
78
Chapter 6:
DaqLink Implementation Guide
Fourtec recommends first time users of the DaqLink system read this chapter before
drilling down into the many features of the system described later in the user guide.
The Implementation Guide will give you a clear understanding of the basic aspects of
setting up the system, and getting the data logger up and running.
6.1.
Pre-setup Requirements
Prior to commencing with the DaqLink implementation you must have the following
requirements in place:
PC

24/7 availability, if online data monitoring is required

Reliable AC power

Sufficient hard disk space to store loggers’ data

One free USB port
DaqLink devices
At least one DaqLink logger DBSA710 or DBSA720.
Mini-USB cable
The mini-USB cable connects the data logger to the PC for logger configuration and
data download (and is supplied with the DataSuite software kit).
6.2.
Launching the Software
1. Install the DataSuite software on the PC workstation. Refer to section ‎17.1:
Installing DataSuite Software on page 150 for more details.
2. Once the software and associated components have been installed, launch
DataSuite from your DataSuite desktop shortcut
3. The main DataSuite window is launched. The default view is called Map View.
79
Figure 31: Main DataSuite window
4. Check for DataSuite updates. Go to Help > Check for Updates from the
DataSuite main menu to check for newer versions of the DaqLink module
software and firmware released since you purchased your system. For more
details on the Update feature go to ‎Chapter 18: Updating DataSuite Software and
Firmware.
6.3.
Connecting the Logger
Note: Multiple DaqLink loggers may be detected by the PC at a time.
1. Only once the DataSuite software and USB driver have been installed, connect
the DaqLink data logger (DBSA710 or DBSA720) to the Fourtec-supplied power
adapter.
Note: Only use adapters provided by Fourtec. Use of the wrong adapter could
damage your DaqLink units.
2. Turn on the unit by pressing the Scroll button
unit will beep when turned on.
on the front keypad. The
3. Connect the mini-USB cable to the computer and to the data logger’s mini-USB
port.
4. From the DataSuite main menu, go to Devices > Detect Device. The data logger
icon will appear in the Map View indicating that the logger is detected.
Figure 32: Adding data logger icon to Map View
80
Note: If the logger is not recognized by the software try connecting the mini-USB
cable to another USB port on the PC. Or select Devices > Detect Device again in
the main menu.
5. Should you disconnect the logger’s USB cable or power adapter (and the battery
eventually dies), the logger icon will be grayed out:
Note: You can move the logger icon elsewhere on the screen by going to Tools >
Lock Map View and unselecting this option.
6.4.
Charging DaqLink Loggers
This section refers to charging the DBSA710 or DBSA720 loggers.
Note: Only use adapters provided by Fourtec. Use of the wrong adapter could
damage your DaqLink units.
If the loggers will run from the battery supply make sure to first charge each of the
loggers for 16 hours before use in order maximize the battery life. A fully charged
battery can last several months, depending on your logger configuration.
If the loggers will run from the AC power supply, when first connected to the AC
adapter the logger will always initiate the 16 hour charge cycle.
However, if you reconnect the AC charger within one hour of disconnection from the
unit, the logger will not start a new 16 hour charging cycle as long as battery level is
at least 90%.
Note: For loggers measuring data with the internal temperature sensor, it is critical to
note that during the charge cycle the logger will heat up thereby causing the internal
temperature sensor reading to rise up to 10 ˚C above ambient temperature. Once the
charging process is complete, the logger will cool down and the internal temperature
sensor readings will return to normal.
For loggers remaining connected to AC power, to prevent the logger from heating up
again following the initial charge cycle, the logger will receive a one minute trickle
charge each day rather than stay continually charged. This is sufficient to ensure the
logger doesn’t self-discharge and will maintain the logger’s full charge status.
6.5.
Loading Map View Background
Load an image into the DataSuite software showing a map of your facility in order to
place the Logger icons in their relative positions. As you deploy more standalone
loggers, this will prove very helpful.

Double click the Map View background to browse to the image directory and load
the image. Remember to unlock the Map View in order to move the icons around.

Right-click the Map View background and two options will be available: Load
Wallpaper and Reset Wallpaper, which resets to the default Fourtec wallpaper.
6.6.
Configuring the Logger
Once the software has detected the DaqLink logger, you must configure the unit in
order to start acquiring data.
1. Right-click on the Logger icon. Select Setup from the context menu.
2. The Setup window will be launched.
81
Figure 33: DaqLink Logger Setup window
This dialog provides non-editable information such as the serial number, battery
level, and firmware version of the current unit.
On the Device Setup and Alarm Setup tabs, the user is able to configure the
following parameters:
 Unit's comment
 Sampling rate
 Memory State
 Averaging points
 Temperature units °C/°F (on the logger LCD)
 Anti-tamper mode
 Active sensors
 Custom sensors' names
 Alarm levels
 Alarm duration
 Alarm delay
 Alarm pre delay
3. Select the Memory State, Online or Optimized Memory Modes.
4. Select the sensors you wish to connect to the logger for data acquisition. It
doesn’t matter which order you select the sensors. You may only have Input 4
selected, for example, and Inputs 1 to 3 left unselected.
5. Select the sampling rate anywhere from 1 every second to 1 every 18 hours.
82
6. Unless you have Alarm levels you wish to edit (see the Alarms Setup tab), click
either Setup and Run (to send the setup and immediately log data), or Setup
Only (to send the setup but only log data at your command).
7. If you selected Setup Only in step 5, right-click the Logger icon and select Run
from the context menu to start logging data or click
in the main tool bar.
8. The Logger icon will appear as follows when in Run mode:
.
9. To stop the logger, right-click the Logger icon and select Stop from the context
menu.
Note: Running the logger clears the logger memory. All previously recorded data will
be erased when you begin a new logging session.
6.7.
Viewing Data
Once you run the logger, you have several ways of viewing the online data that is
being acquired.

Online graph/table/statistics views

Logger icon tooltip

Sensor view
6.7.1.
Online Data Views
Double clicking the Logger icon or selecting Display Data in the Logger icon context
menu will open the online graph.
This graph is updated in real-time with the newly recorded data.
You can switch between Graph, Table and Statistics views to view the data in
different formats.
Figure 34: Online data – Graph view
83
Figure 35: Online data – Table view
Figure 36: Online data – Statistics view
6.7.2.
Logger Tooltip
Close the online data window and return to Map View. Scroll over the Logger icon
and you will see a tooltip displaying the relevant logger information, including realtime data.
Figure 37: Logger tooltip
This tool-tip is updated with every newly recorded sample.
6.7.3.
Sensor View
Click the Sensor View icon
in the tool bar to switch to this view. Here, you can
monitor the data by viewing data display of each individual sensor, rather than of
each logger.
Figure 38: Sensor view
84

If the sensor is in alarm, the sensor box will change color from green to red (just
as the Logger icon would).

Double-clicking the individual sensor box will open the data in the online Graph
view.
6.8.
Downloading Data
If the logger is being used as a standalone device you will have to connect it to the
computer via USB cable in order to download the data to the software.
1. Connect logger to PC and go to Devices > Detect Device in the main menu.
2. To download data right-click the logger icon and select Download Data.
3. View the downloaded data by double-clicking the logger icon.
85
Chapter 7:
DaqLink Hardware Overview
This chapter details the hardware features of the DaqLink data loggers.
7.1.
Data Logger Front Panel Layout
7.1.1.
DBSA710 and DBSA720
Apart from the color scheme, the DBSA710 and DBSA720 data logger models have
the same front panel design.
LCD screen
Menu/Enter button
Scroll button
Figure 39: DBSA710 data logger front panel
LCD screen
Displays logger status and logger data.
Menu/Enter button
Use to enter logger menu options and to execute logger commands.
Scroll button
Use to scroll though menu items and to power on unit.
7.2.
Data Logger External Connections
7.2.1.
DBSA710 and DBSA720
External connections of the DBSA710 and DBSA720 are exactly the same.
Mini USB port
12 V power socket
Negative Center
Four sensor Excitation
inputs
Figure 40: DBSA720 data logger external connections
86
Mini USB Port
To enable communication between logger and PC, for configuration and data
download.
12 V Power Socket
To connect logger to external power supply (negative center).
Sensor Inputs
Pluggable screw terminal blocks marked In-1 to In-4 (from left to right), to
connect wide range of sensor types for data acquisition. All four inputs can be
used simultaneously. Sensors can be connected in any order.
To connect a sensor to the DaqLink data logger, unplug the screw terminal,
connect the sensor’s wires to the terminals, and then plug the terminal back to
the corresponding socket on the input block.
Excitation socket
Output power socket used to power external sensors, power derived directly
from 12 V @ 2A external power supply adaptor.
7.3.
Data Logger Sensor Overview
This section provides an overview of the hardware specifications of the DaqLink data
loggers.
7.3.1.
Internal Sensor Types
The DBSA710 and DBSA720 loggers include internal sensors, depending on the
logger model.
Sensor
Digital Humidity
Measurement
Range
5% to 95%
Accuracy
±3% (in DataSuite
software)
Logger
Model
DBSA720
±4% (on logger LCD)
Digital
Temperature
-20 ºC to 50 ºC
±0.5 ºC
DBSA720
Temperature
PT100
-20 ºC to 50 ºC
±0.3 ºC
DBSA710
7.3.2.
External Sensor Types
DBSA710 and DBSA720
Each of the four input channels of these data logger models are multi-purpose and
can be individually configured to any of the following types and ranges.
Sensor
Measurement Range
Accuracy
Available Inputs
Current
4 to 20 mA
± 0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
Contact
Open (0) /
Close (1)
N/A
In-1 to In-4
87
Sensor
Measurement Range
Accuracy
Available Inputs
Frequency
20 Hz to 4 KHz
N/A
In-4 only
Pulse Counter
1 to 65,536 pulses
N/A
In-4 only
-200 to -60 ºC ±0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
0 to 4 KHz
Temperature
PT100 (2-wire)
-200 to 400 ºC
Temperature TC-J
-200 ºC to 1,000 ºC
-60 to 60 ºC ±0.3 ˚C
60 to 400 ºC ±0.5 %
-200 to -60 ºC ±0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
-60 to 60 ºC ±0.5 ˚C
60 to 1,000 ºC ±0.5 %
Temperature TC-K
-200 ºC to 1,000 ºC
-200 to -60 ºC ±0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
-60 to 60 ºC ±0.5 ˚C
60 to 1,000 ºC ±0.5 %
Temperature TC-T
-200 ºC to 400 ºC
-200 to -60 ºC ±0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
-60 to 60 ºC ±0.5 ˚C
60 to 400 ºC ±0.5 %
Voltage
0 to 1 V
± 0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
Voltage
0 to 50 mV
± 0.5 %
In-1 to In-4
7.3.3.
Sensor Connection
Connect the sensor/s to the terminal block/s at the top of data logger:
Figure 41: DaqLink logger sensor inputs
Sensors do not have to be added successively. You may only configure In-4, or
configure In-1 and In-3, for example, when setting up the logger via the software.
7.3.4.
External PT-100 Sensor Connection
The polarity of the Fourtec-supplied PT-100 temperature sensor (supporting both
DaqLink models) for correct wire-up to the data logger’s terminal blocks is as follows:

Two red wires are intertwined and connected together to the negative (–) input.

The white wire is connected to the positive (+) input.
88
7.3.5.
Programming Limitations for DBSA710 and
DBSA720
The standard sampling rate for all sensors on all inputs is from a maximum of one
sample every second to a minimum of one sample every 18 hours. However, there
are certain limitations using a specific combination of sensors, which must be taken
into account when programming the DaqLink data loggers.
Note: The software integrates all programming limitations automatically when
configuring the loggers.
Please refer to the table below for DaqLink programming limitations, where:
PT100, Thermocouple J, K or T
=
A
Internal Digital Temperature (on
DBSA720)
=
B
Sensor
Combination
3xA
Maximum Sampling Rate
One sample every three seconds
Example Setup
In-1: PT-100
4xA
In-2: TC-J
A+B
In-3: TC-J
(2 x A) + B
(3 x A) + B
One sample every four seconds
Internal: Temp
In-1: TC-T
In-2: PT-100
(4 x A) + B
One sample every five seconds
Internal: Temp
In-1: TC-T
In-2: TC-J
In-3: PT-100
In-4: PT-100
Table 3: Data Logger programming limitations
7.3.6.
External Alarm Output
The DaqLink system supports connection of an external alarm e.g. siren, audible
alarm, to In-1 of the DBSA710 and DBSA720 data loggers.
When connected to the logger, the external alarm will be activated only when that
logger is in alarm status.
Once there is no alarm status, the external alarm will be deactivated.
Data Logger External Alarm
In-1 of the DBSA710 and DBSA720 serves either as a standard sensor input or as an
external alarm output. Ensure the logger is connected to AC power if connected to an
external alarm.
Configure In-1 as Alarm Normally Open or Alarm Normally Closed in the logger
Setup window in the DataSuite software.
89
Normally Open will result in the alarm being activated during alarm status (the circuit
will be closed).
Normally Closed will result in the alarm being activated when logger is not in alarm
and therefore deactivated when there is an alarm (the circuit will be opened).
Connect In-1 to your external alarm device and connect the logger to AC power.
Use the Alarm Setup tab in the Setup dialog to define the logger alarm settings. If
these settings are breached then the alarm will be activated.
External Alarm Schematic
See the schematic below explaining how to hook up an external alarm to the DaqLink
unit.
- +
-
+
Relay
-
+
+
-
3-4 V battery
to power relay
Alarm device
(e.g. siren)
Figure 42: External alarm schematic

+ from DaqLink unit goes to – of the Relay inputs

+ of Relay input goes to battery that powers the Relay

Load inputs of the Relay go to the Alarm device e.g. siren, lights, etc.

- of the battery goes to – of the DaqLink unit.
Note: Maximum load of the Relay is 50 mA, 3 V.
Refer to ‎Appendix B: DaqLink Specifications for the full external alarm output
specification.
7.3.7.
Polarity
Current, voltage, thermocouples and user defined sensors have distinct polarity. Be
careful to connect them in the right polarity.
7.3.8.
Frequency/Pulse Counter
Connect the signal wires to In-4 terminal blocks, and select Frequency or Pulse
counter for Input 4 from the logger Setup window in the DataSuite software. Inputs 1
to 3 are still available for other sensors.
90
The Frequency/Pulse counter is optically isolated from the internal circuitry and can
simultaneously measure a signal source, together with another input.
7.3.9.
User Defined Sensors
DaqLink provides a simple and straightforward tool for defining a limited number of
custom sensors. Almost any sensor or transducer with 0 – 1 V or 4 – 20 mA output is
accepted by the DaqLink logger and its electrical units are automatically scaled to
meaningful user-defined engineering units.
The sensor definitions are stored in the logger’s memory and are added to the
sensors list. The sensor’s readings are displayed in the user defined units only in the
DataSuite software. Future versions will also support displaying the user defined
engineering units on the logger LCD.
Refer to section ‎17.8.1 for more details.
7.3.10. Sensor Alarms
Via the software, users can define minimum and maximum alarm levels for each
input individually. Users can define pre-low and pre-high alarm levels, for an
additional level of safety in case the logger is approaching an actual breach of alarm.
The DaqLink logger display indicates when the sensor reading is in alarm of any
type. The symbols AL-H, AL-L, AL-P-H or AL-P-L are visible next to the
corresponding input readings.
Refer to section ‎0 for more details.
7.3.11. Sensor Calibration
The DaqLink data logger is shipped fully calibrated. However, further calibration can
be applied via the DataSuite software. The calibration parameters are sent to the
data loggers via USB connection and stored in the logger’s memory.
Users may calibrate individual inputs as well as all inputs at once. Calibration settings
may be saved and then loaded into the logger at a later date if the calibration settings
have changed.
Refer to section ‎17.19.4‎17.20 for more details.
7.4.
Unit Serial Number and Comment
Every DaqLink data logger unit is embedded with a unique serial number.
The data logger only can be loaded with a descriptive comment to identify its task
and location. You may add or edit the logger comment via the DataSuite software.
Every time data is transferred to the computer it is labeled both with the logger’s
serial number and comment and is displayed in the graph or data table view.
The unit serial number is also marked on a sticker on the back of the product.
91
7.5.
Power Supply
7.5.1.
DBSA710 and DBSA720 Data Loggers
The DBSA710 and DBSA720 data loggers run from an internal NiMh rechargeable
battery as well as from external AC power supply. Depending on the logger
configuration, from a fully charged battery, the data logger can run for up to several
months. Refer to section ‎4.9.7‎7.5.3 for more details on battery life.
Note: Charge the data logger units for 16 hours before using them for the first time.
When connected to external power supply, the data logger battery will not be
charged when the unit is turned off. This will allow the system to protect the battery
from overheating.
First Time Charging
From a fully drained battery, you must charge the battery for 16 hours to bring it to a
full charge. Once the charge cycle is complete, the logger will run from the external
power supply, without draining (or charging) the internal battery. In order to maintain
a fully charged battery and ensure the battery doesn’t self-discharge, the battery
charger will daily charge the unit for one minute to maintain the battery capacity.
Note: Before storing the DaqLink units make sure you have unplugged all the
sensors and turned the units off via the keypad.
Standard Charging
Whenever a logger is reconnected to the charger it will begin the 16-hour charge
cycle, no matter what the status of the battery. Once the charging cycle is complete
the logger will run from external power supply.
However, if you reconnect the AC charger within one hour of disconnection from the
unit, the logger will not start a new 16 hour charging cycle as long as battery level is
at least 90%.
Effect of Charging Battery on Temperature Sensor
For loggers measuring data with the internal temperature sensor, it is critical to note
that during the charge cycle the logger will heat up thereby causing the internal
temperature sensor reading to rise by up to 10 ˚C above ambient temperature. Once
the charging process is complete, the logger will cool down and the internal
temperature sensor readings will return to normal.
For loggers remaining connected to AC power, to prevent the logger from heating up
again following the initial charge cycle, the logger will receive a one minute trickle
charge each day rather than stay continually charged. This is sufficient to ensure the
logger doesn’t self-discharge and will maintain the logger’s full charge status.
7.5.2.
Power Adapter
The DaqLink power adapter is used to power the DBSA710 and DBSA720 units. The
mains adaptor (AC/DC adaptor) converts mains power (from a wall outlet) to a
voltage suitable to the DaqLink hardware unit.

Output: Capacitor filtered 9 to 12 VDC, 300 mA

Female plug, center negative
92
Note: Only use Fourtec-supplied power adapters to avoid damaging the units with
incorrect power supply.
7.5.3.
Data Logger Battery Life
Battery life depends on the logger sampling rate, type of sensor, and number of
measured sensors.
DBSA710 and DBSA720 can last up to six months on a charged battery depending
on logger configuration.
7.6.
USB Communication Cable
A mini USB communication cable is supplied as part of the DataSuite software kit.
This cable connects the DaqLink data logger to the DaqLink PC workstation. When
connected to the PC the logger can communicate with the software for configuration
and data download purposes, for example.
The USB cable also powers the logger when connected to the PC but it does not
charge the internal battery.
Note: The USB driver is installed as part of the software installation process. Without
this driver the PC won’t detect the logger. To avoid compatibility problems do not
connect the logger to the PC before installing the USB driver.
Type B plug
Connect to PC USB port
Type A plug
Connect to logger USB port
Figure 43: USB communication cable
7.7.
DaqLink Keypad Overview
7.7.1.
DBSA710 and DBSA720 Keypad
The DBSA710 and DBSA720 units each have two buttons on the keypad, which are
used to navigate through the LCD menu options, as well as turn on the units.
Refer to section ‎4.12 to learn how to operate the data loggers.
93
The Menu button
has
two functionalities:
Navigate to the main menu.
When pressed from within a
submenu, the display will take you
back to the main menu.
Selecting an option from one of
the menus. When pressed on one
of the main menu items, it will take
you to the sub menu options.
The Scroll button
functionalities:
has two
When the unit is off, pressing this
button will power the unit on.
Scrolls through the menu options.
7.8.
Operating the DBSA710 and DBSA720
This section explains how to operate the DBSA710 and DBSA720 loggers and
provides an overview of the menu options on the units’ LCD screen.
7.8.1.
Turning on the Unit
In order to view the logger menu options, the unit must be powered on by pressing
the Scroll button
on the keypad. Ensure the logger is charged or connected to
the AC adapter.
Once the unit is switched on it will emit a short beep and the screen will display a
welcome message:
DaqLink DBSA710
Ready
7.8.2.
Display Shutdown
If the logger screen is inactive for thirty seconds it will turn off. However the logger
willTcontinue to operate in the background. Press the Scroll button to enable the LCD
screen again. The screen will not turn off during firmware upgrade.
7.8.3.
Main Menu Options
There are two menu categories on the data logger:

View Data
 TStatus
Note: If the unit is not in Run mode only the Status menu options will be available.
94
T
Press the Menu
button to reach the main menu display. Scroll through the
main menu options (View Data, Status) using the Scroll button. Once you reach the
main menu option you need, press Enter to select that option and enter the sub
menus.
View Data Menu
View Data
Note: View Data is the default page when the unit is running.
If there is more than one sensor running, the screen will auto scroll between the
sensors showing the sensor name and senor value. These are real-time displays.
The display will switch back to the View Data screen after five minutes if none of
logger buttons have been pressed.
If the sensor breached any of the predefined alarm levels, then the alarm symbol will
be displayed alongside the data reading.
For example:
In-TMP
24˚C
AL-Lo
The logger display alarm symbols are:

AL-HI : Alarm High

AL-Lo : Alarm Low

AL-P-H : Pre Alarm High

AL-P-L : Pre Alarm Low
Status Menu
Status
The Status menu contains the following sub menus, all reachable by using the Scroll
button.
The sub menus are outlined below in the order in which they appear on the logger
display.
Name and Status
As explained previously, the unit name (or Comment) is displayed on the first row
and the second row indicates the logger status.
If the logger is running, then the following screen is displayed.
95
Fourtec DaqLink
Logger running
Batt Level (battery level)
If the power adapter is not connected the battery percentage will be displayed.
If the power adapter is connected External power will be displayed.
Batt Level:
67%
Batt Level:
External power
Logger Version
This menu informs the user of the logger firmware version. This is helpful when you
need to upgrade the system firmware, to check the current version. Or when
contacting Fourtec technical support, with any technical issues.
Logger version:
2.03.00.01.98.00
s firmware version is commonly referred to by the numbers in bold in the screen
The
above. For example, the firmware version which is supported by this user guide is
v1.98.
S/N
This menu displays the unit’s eight digit SN.
S/N 12345678
Memory Mode
There are two possible device modes:

Stop when full – when the logger memory is full the logger will stop logging.

Cyclic mode – for continuous logging. The logger will continue to log once the
memory is full by writing over the first recorded samples.
The memory mode is toggled in the Setup dialog, using the Cyclic Mode checkbox.
When the logger memory is full, the LCD will display Memory Full.
Press Menu to pause logger (when logger is in Run mode)
By pressing the Menu button, the logger will cease to log data until the Menu button
is pressed again from the same screen.
When in Paused mode, the user can still scroll through the logger menu screens and
use other features. The user must scroll back to the Pause Logger menu in order to
resume the logger operation.
96
Reset Unit
When the unit is reset, upon start up it will automatically reconnect to the DataSuite
software if a USB connection is established. In addition, if the logger will continue to
operate according to its last set up instruction. For example, if the logger was in Run
mode, then after reset it will continue to run and record data.
Turn Off Unit / Stop and turn off
Selecting this option will shut the unit down. You can turn the unit on again by
pressing the Scroll button.
If the logger is in Run mode, selecting this option will first stop the logger, and then
turn it off.
It is recommended to turn off the unit when it is not in use.
7.8.4.
Additional Logger Screens
Loading Firmware
When updating the firmware of the data logger via the software’s Firmware Update
Center, the logger screen will display the update progress. When complete the main
logger status screen will be displayed.
Also refer to ‎Chapter 18: Updating DataSuite Software and Firmware.
Loading firmware
Progress: 55%
Note: Logger must be in Stop mode before firmware can be updated.
97
Chapter 8:
MicroLite Overview
This chapter provides a general overview of the MicroLite II generation of data
loggers.
8.1.
MicroLite Introduction
Accurate, portable, cable-free range of USB loggers
The MicroLite II product family is a compact line of USB data loggers designed for
accurate monitoring of various parameters for a wide range of applications. Typical
applications include cold chain management, transportation as well as warehousing
of food, drugs and hi-tech equipment.
There are two generations of MicroLite data loggers:

First generation MicroLite I for Temperature monitoring supported by the
MicroLab Lite software (refer to separate MicroLab Lite user guide for using
MicroLite I with this software)

Second generation MicroLite II for Voltage, Current, Temperature and Humidity
monitoring supported by the DataSuite software. The MicroLite II models have
enhanced functionality compared to the MicroLite I models.
This user guides refers to the MicroLite II series only.
Key MicroLite benefits include:

High accuracy, high functionality, low cost data logger

Direct USB interface for setup, data download and firmware updates

Unique Boomerang feature that automatically creates and emails PDF data report
when logger is connected to PC

Complimentary DataSuite Software for comprehensive data analysis and logger
calibration

Rapid data download to Graph, Table view and Excel spreadsheet

LCD featuring up to 3 decimal point readings, min/max data history and battery
level indication

LED alarm indicator

Up to 2-year battery life, depending on operating conditions and sampling rate

Up to 32,000 sample memory accommodating long-haul transports

Magnet key to mark time stamps, activate and stop logging

Built-in real-time clock and calendar

Dust and water resistant, depending on logger model

Cradle wall mounting for fixed monitoring
98
8.2.

MicroLite Packaging
Shipped in a carton containing:
 MicroLite data logger and attached cradle wall mounting
 Nylon bag containing magnet key accessory , screws and screw anchors and
zip ties (for external input models)
 For external input loggers only, one terminal block (green) connected to the
external input on the logger cap
Each logger packaging also includes a quick start guide to help first-time users get
set up.
In order to save battery life, the MicroLite’s are shipped in Stop mode. This means
that before you can start recording, you must first connect the logger to the computer
and set it up using the DataSuite software.
8.2.1.
The Data Logger
The MicroLite II family includes six models:

LITE5008P and LITE5032P: MicroLite II Internal Temperature (8K or 32K sample
memory models)

LITE5032P-RH: MicroLite II Internal Temperature/RH

LITE5032P-4/20: MicroLite II External 4-20 mA

LITE5032P-V: MicroLite II External 0-10 V

LITE5032P-EXT: MicroLite II External NTC Temperature
The MicroLite LCD screen continuously displays the most recent samples, and users
can also define minimum and maximum alarm levels via the software for a specific
shipment, for example. The LCD screen will also show alarm icons if either level is
breached.
99
The accompanying magnet key is used to activate and stop the device, and mark a
time stamp.
The data stored by the MicroLite can be downloaded to any computer with DataSuite
installed, for further viewing and analysis, and can also be exported to an Excel
spreadsheet.
The data logger is programmed to consume as little power as possible during
operation, in order to conserve the battery life. When not recording data (in Stop
mode), the units are placed in deep sleep mode after two minutes. The LCD will turn
off. The units wake up upon connection to USB or by using the magnet key.
The MicroLite battery is easily replaceable and can run up to two years, depending
on the logger configuration and model.
MicroLite Data Loggers
Part Number:
Part Number:
MicroLite II: LITE5032P-RH
MicroLite II: LITE5008P, LITE5032P
Two internal digital and humidity
temperature sensors and USB interface
One internal NTC temperature sensor and
USB interface
Memory Capacity: 32,000 samples
Memory Capacity: Four models:
MicroLite II: 8,000 and 32,000 samples
Power supply: Battery operated
Power supply: Battery operated
100
Part Number:
Part Number:
MicroLite II: LITE5032P-4/20
MicroLite II: LITE5032P-V
One 4-20 mA current input and USB interface.
Logger cap contains universal connector for
current sensor. When cap is removed, USB
interface is available.
Memory Capacity: 32,000 samples
One 0-10 V voltage input and USB interface.
Logger cap contains universal connector for
voltage sensor. When cap is removed, USB
interface is available.
Memory Capacity: 32,000 samples
Power supply: Battery operated
Power supply: Battery operated
Part Number:
MicroLite II: LITE5032P-EXT
One NTC -50 to 150 C temperature input and
USB interface. Logger cap contains universal
connector for temperature sensor. When cap is
removed, USB interface is available.
Sensor is included.
Memory Capacity: 32,000 samples
Power supply: Battery operated
8.2.2.
Hardware Accessories
A magnet key is provided to stop and activate the logger as well as to mark time
stamps. In addition, a green terminal block is attached to the external logger cap for
the
101
Chapter 9:
MicroLite Implementation Guide
Fourtec recommends first time users of the MicroLite system read this chapter before
drilling down into the many features of the system described later in the user guide.
The Implementation Guide will give you a clear understanding of the basic aspects of
setting up the system, and getting the data logger up and running.
9.1.
Pre-setup Requirements
Prior to commencing with the MicroLite implementation you must have the following
requirements in place:
PC

24/7 availability, if online data monitoring is required

Reliable AC power

Sufficient hard disk space to store loggers’ data

One free USB port
MicroLite devices
At least one MicroLite logger.
9.2.
Launching the Software
1. Install the DataSuite software on the PC workstation. Refer to section ‎17.1:
Installing DataSuite Software on page 150 for more details.
2. Once the software and associated components have been installed, launch
DataSuite from your DataSuite desktop shortcut
3. The main DataSuite window is launched. The default view is called Map View.
Figure 44: Main DataSuite window
102
4. Check for DataSuite updates. Go to Help > Check for Updates from the
DataSuite main menu to check for newer versions of the MicroLite module
software and firmware released since you purchased your system. For more
details on the Update feature go to ‎Chapter 18: Updating DataSuite Software and
Firmware.
9.3.
Connecting the Logger
Note: Multiple MicroLite loggers may be detected by the PC at a time.
1. Only once the DataSuite software has been installed, connect the MicroLite data
logger via the USB interface.
2. Assuming this is the first time the logger is used following purchase, it will be in
deep sleep mode. When connected to the PC, the logger will automatically turn
on.
3. When turned on the LCD will display Hello followed by the firmware version and
finally, Stop.
4. When first detected by the DataSuite software, the logger icon will appear in the
Map View. If the logger icon does not appear, from the DataSuite main menu, go
to Devices > Detect Device.
Figure 45: Adding data logger icon to Map View
Note: If the logger is not recognized by the software try connecting the logger to
another USB port on the PC. Ensure the unit is turned on and select Devices >
Detect Device again in the main menu.
5. Should you disconnect the logger’s USB cable the logger icon will be grayed out:
.
Note: You can move the logger icon elsewhere on the screen by going to Tools >
Lock Map View and unselecting this option.
9.4.
Loading Map View Background
Load an image into the DataSuite software showing a map of your facility in order to
place the Logger icons in their relative positions. As you deploy more standalone
loggers, this will prove very helpful.

Double click the Map View background to browse to the image directory and load
the image. Remember to unlock the Map View in order to move the icons around.

Right-click the Map View background and two options will be available: Load
Wallpaper and Reset Wallpaper, which resets to the default Fourtec wallpaper.
103
9.5.
Configuring the Logger
Once the software has detected the MicroLite logger, you must configure the unit in
order to start acquiring data.
1. Right-click on the Logger icon. Select Setup from the context menu.
The Setup window will be launched.
Figure 46: MicroLite II Logger Setup window
This dialog provides non-editable information such as the serial number, battery
level, model number and firmware version of the current unit.
On the Properties and Sensors tabs, the user is able to configure the following
parameters:
 Unit's comment
 Sampling rate
 Activation and memory modes
 Averaging points
 Temperature units °C/°F (on the logger LCD)
 Display of Min/Max data on LCD
 Active sensors
 Alarm levels
 Alarm delay
104
2. In the Properties tab:
a. Select the memory mode: Cyclic or non-Cyclic
b. Select the activation mode: Push to Run, Timer Run or leave the checkboxes
unmarked for immediate activation.
a. If you want the ability to stop the logger during operation, select the ‘Stop on
key press’ checkbox.
b. For external input models, if you want the logger to stop recording data when
the cap is removed, select the ‘Stop on cap removal’ checkbox. Note that the
logger will only stop when the next sample is due to be recorded.
c. Select the sampling rate anywhere from 1 every second to 1 every 18 hours.
Refer to the Recording Time to ensure the logger won’t stop or begin cyclic
recording before the end of your specific measurement session.
3. In the Sensors tab:
a. For the Temp/RH model, select the sensors you wish to activate during the
current logging session. All other models feature just one sensor, and at least
one sensor must always be selected.
b. If you require alarm levels, select the relevant checkboxes and enter the
specific threshold values.
4. In the Power Saving Settings tab:
a. Configure the LCD screen. If you wish to conserve battery life, and do not
require a permanent visual data display, select the options to turn on the LCD
screen only for alarms or button press.
b. Configure the LED, which indicates logger alarm status while logger is
running.
5. In the Boomerang Report tab:
a. Enable the Boomerang feature via this tab. Enter contacts to receive the data
report via email when logger is connected to another computer with DataSuite
installed. Refer to section ‎17.25 for more details.
6. From any of the tabs, click Setup and Run to begin logging or Setup if you wish
to run the logger later.
7. The Logger icon will appear as follows when in Run mode:
8. For the external input logger models, the logger LCD will display NC (No Cap)
when placed in Run mode. This is because the logger won’t actually begin
recording data until the logger cap is closed on the logger body (to connect the
logger to the USB the cap must first be removed). Therefore, ensure that the cap
is connected to an external sensor before closing it on the logger to avoid
erroneous data. For more details on the logger cap detection mechanism, refer to
section ‎10.8.1.
9. To stop the logger, right-click the Logger icon and select Stop from the context
menu. Or use the magnet key if you previously enabled the ‘Stop on key press’
option.
Note: Running the logger clears the logger memory. All previously recorded data will
be erased when you begin a new logging session.
105
9.6.
Viewing Data
Once you run the logger, you have several ways of viewing the online data that is
being acquired.

Online graph/table/statistics views

Logger icon tooltip

Sensor view
9.6.1.
Online Data Views
Note: Only the MicroLite models featuring internal sensors (Temp and Temp/RH)
support online data view.
Double clicking the Logger icon or selecting Display Data in the Logger icon context
menu will open the online graph.
This graph is updated in real-time with the newly recorded data.
You can switch between Graph, Table and Statistics views to view the data in
different formats.
Figure 47: Online data – Graph view
106
Figure 48: Online data – Table view
Figure 49: Online data – Statistics view
9.6.2.
Logger Tooltip
Close the online data window and return to Map View. Scroll over the Logger icon
and you will see a tooltip displaying the relevant logger information, including realtime data.
Figure 50: Logger tooltip
This tool-tip is updated with every newly recorded sample.
9.6.3.
Sensor View
Click the Sensor View icon
in the tool bar to switch to this view. Here, you can
monitor the data by viewing data display of each individual sensor, rather than of
each logger.
107
Figure 51: Sensor view

If the sensor is in alarm, the sensor box will change color from green to red (just
as the Logger icon would).

Double-clicking the individual sensor box will open the data in the online Graph
view.
9.7.
Downloading Data
If the logger is being used as a standalone device you will have to connect it to the
computer via USB in order to download the data to the software.
1. Connect logger to PC and go to Devices > Detect Device in the main menu.
2. Data download should begin automatically. To manually download data right-click
the logger icon and select Download Data.
3. View the downloaded data by double-clicking the logger icon.
108
Chapter 10:
MicroLite Hardware Overview
This chapter details the hardware features of the MicroLite data loggers.
10.1.
Data Logger Layout
Front LCD View (Temp/RH model)
Logger
cap
LCD screen
USB
interface
LED
Rear View (Temp/RH model)
Battery
holder
Magnet
holder
Temp/RH
sensor
location
External Cap View
External
input cap
External input cap
with universal
connector
109
Polarity of Two-wire Connector (for mA, V and NTC inputs)
LCD screen
Displays logger status, logger data, alarm level, battery level and
engineering units.
LED
Blue LED indicates activation, logging and alarm status
Magnet Holder
Insert the magnet key here when performing stop, run, time stamp
functionality.
Battery Holder
Location of replaceable battery compartment
External Input Cap
Special cap interfacing the external sensor to the logger’s USB connector.
10.2.
MicroLite Sensor Overview
This section provides an overview of the sensor specifications of the MicroLite data
loggers.
10.2.1. Internal Sensor Types
Sensor
Measurement
Range
Accuracy
Logger Model
Digital Humidity
5% to 95%
±2%
LITE5032P-RH
Digital
Temperature
-40 ºC to 80 ºC
±0.3 ºC
LITE5032P-RH
Temperature
NTC
-40 ºC to 80 ºC
±0.3 ºC
110
LITE5008P
LITE5032P
10.2.2. External Sensor Types
Sensor
Measurement
Range
Accuracy
Logger Model
Current
4 to 20 mA
± 20 µA
LITE5032P-RH
Voltage
0 to 10 V
± 5 mV
LITE5032P-RH
Temperature
NTC 10K Probe
-50 to 150 ºC
± 0.3 °C
LITE5032-EXT
10.2.3. User Defined Sensors
DataSuite software provides a simple and straightforward tool for defining a limited
number of custom sensors. Almost any sensor or transducer with 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20
mA output is accepted by the MicroLite II Current and Voltage loggers’ universal
connectors. Electrical units are automatically scaled to meaningful user-defined
engineering units.
The sensor definitions are stored in the logger’s memory and are added to the
sensors list in the Setup window.
The logger LCD supports the following units for user-defined sensors: mA, V, °C, °F,
PSI, BAR, PH, and PPM. These are displayed together with the scaled values.
All types of user-defined engineering units are displayed in the DataSuite software.
Refer to section ‎17.8.1 for more details.
10.2.1. Sensor Calibration
All MicroLite loggers may be calibrated via the DataSuite software. The calibration
parameters are sent to the data loggers via USB connection and stored in the
logger’s memory. Refer to section ‎17.20 for more details.
10.3.
Unit Serial Number and Comment
Every MicroLite data logger unit is embedded with a unique serial number.
The data logger only can be loaded with a descriptive comment to identify its task
and location. You may add or edit the logger comment via the DataSuite software.
Every time data is transferred to the computer it is labeled both with the logger’s
serial number and comment and is displayed in the graph or data table view.
The unit serial number is also marked on a sticker below the unit’s USB connector.
10.4.
Power Supply
The MicroLite data loggers run from one internal, replaceable CR2032 3V lithium
battery. Depending on the logger model, configuration and operating conditions, from
a new battery, the data logger can run for up to 2 years.
The battery maintains the logger’s Real-Time Clock (RTC). The logger’s time/date
settings are synchronized with the PC when you perform a Setup.
111
Note: When connected to the PC via USB, the logger will draw its power via the USB
port and not via the internal battery.
10.4.1. Battery Level Indication
The MicroLite battery level indication is viewed as follows:

On the logger LCD

In the DataSuite logger Setup dialog and logger icon tooltip in Map View
Battery Level on Logger LCD

4-segment battery icon is displayed on the logger LCD (it is always displayed)
The definition of each segment is:
 3 segments: 100%
 2 segments: 50 > 99%
 1 segment: 25 > 49%
 0 segments: 0 > 24%
Measurement of Battery Voltage
The battery voltage is measured as follows:

Each time the device is removed from the USB and is updated in the software
upon reconnection to PC.

When the logger is in Run mode and not connected to the USB, it is measured
every hour and recorded to the logger memory. When reconnected to USB,
DataSuite takes the last battery reading recorded to memory.
Recognizing when MicroLite Battery needs Replacing
If the MicroLite LCD shuts off immediately upon PC disconnection, this means that
the logger battery must be replaced. The logger is powered via USB when connected
to the PC, so the LCD will always turn on even if the battery is empty or missing. The
DataSuite software does not take a measurement of the battery voltage when the
logger is connected to the USB, so it will not provide indication that the battery is
actually 0%.
Note: Following firmware upgrade from v0.95 to v1.01, the battery reading in
DataSuite will be viewed as NA, until the device is removed from the USB and
reconnected to the PC. The correct battery reading will then be displayed.
10.4.2. Battery Life
In optimal conditions, the battery’s maximum lifespan can range from between one to
two years. The MicroLite is able to conserve battery life by placing itself in sleep
mode between data recordings. While in sleep mode, the data logger consumes a
112
minimal amount of power. The MicroLite will then wake up for a few micro-seconds
whenever it has to record a data sample or display new data on the LCD screen.
You always have the option of disabling the LCD during logging, only to turn on
during alarm state. Refer to section ‎17.17.4 for more details. In addition, you may
disable the LED alarm indication – this will also reduce power consumption and
prolong battery life.
10.4.3. Replacing the Battery
Replacing the battery does not result in any data loss. In addition, the logger’s
configuration settings are also retained.
Internal battery
compartment
(with battery
inside)
Removable
battery cover
As shown in the figure above, the MicroLite internal lithium battery is located under a
removable plastic cover.
To replace the battery, simply use the groove in the plastic cover to twist the cover
open, and pull out the battery. When twisting the cover back into position, ensure that
the small ridge on the battery cover is in line with the similar ridge on the logger case,
as indicated in the figure below.
Ensure ridge on
cover and on
logger case are in
line
Note: Be sure to twist the plastic cover properly back into a sealed position, to
maintain the MicroLite’s dust and waterproof compliancy.
After replacing the battery, the MicroLite LCD will be in Stop mode.
10.5.
USB Connection
The MicroLite interfaces with the computer via any of its USB Host ports. No USB
driver installation is required in order to be detected by the computer and by the
DataSuite software. The software will automatically detect the device upon
connection to the PC.
113
10.6.
LCD Screen Overview
The MicroLite has a 4-digit 7-segment LCD screen, which is able to display the
following information:

The sensor reading currently recorded

Sensor reading of up to three decimal places (if the reading integer is less than
10 e.g. 2.543 V)

If logger is in Stop, Timer Run or Push to Run modes

Low or High alarm indication

Min/Max readings

Full logger memory status

Marking of a time stamp

External Cap is not connected (external input models only)

Battery level
10.6.1. LCD Status Messages

USB – Indicates that the logger is connected to the PC via USB

Stop - The logger is currently in Stop mode, not sampling data

Run – Visible immediately before the logger is about to start sampling data, once
the Run command was sent.

Push – Indicates the logger is in Push to Run mode, as configured in the logger
Setup window.

tRUN - Indicates the logger is in Timer Run mode, as configured in the logger
Setup window.

F – Indicates the MicroLite Firmware version e.g. 00.83

T01, T02, etc. – Indicates that a time stamp has been taken

FULL – Indicates that the logger memory has reached full capacity and the
logger has stopped

NC – Indicates that 'no cap' is currently connected to the logger and is relevant
for the external input models only (Current, Voltage, and Temperature). The
logger will only start running when the cap is connected to avoid sampling of data
before the external sensor is connected
10.6.2. LCD Mode of Operation
For the MicroLite II only, in the Power Saving Settings tab in the logger Setup
window the user has the option to define several modes of operation for the LCD
screen when sampling.

Always On: The LCD will never turn off

LCD is off, and will turn on for 30, 60 or 120 seconds upon alarm state or magnet
key operation
In addition, when the logger is not sampling (in Stop mode) the LCD will shut down
after two minutes of inactivity in order to conserve battery life.
114
10.7.
LED Overview
The MicroLite features a LED to give real-time indication of activation and alarms.

Sample with alarm – When in Run mode, the LED will flash blue at five second
intervals once an alarm is recorded, until the logger memory is cleared. There is
no LED indication when there is no alarm.
Note: To configure the LED alarm indication functionality in MicroLite II devices,
enter the Power Saving Settings tab in the logger Setup window, and
select/unselect the Disable LED alarm indications… checkbox accordingly.
Disabling this feature will also prolong battery life.

Sample without alarm – The LED will not flash with each recorded sample

Connected to USB – The LED will permanently indicate blue as long as the unit
is connected to the computer via USB and in Stop mode.

Marking a time stamp – The LED will flash blue when a time stamp is marked,
as it is recording a new sample to the logger memory.
10.8.
Logger Cap for External Input Models
The MicroLite II external input models (current, voltage, temperature) feature an
industrial screw-to-wire interface located inside the logger cap. This enables
connection with the logger’s USB connector making data sampling possible. When
the cap is not connected to the logger no sampling is possible. Hence these models
do not support online data sampling.
10.8.1. External Sensor Cap Detection Mechanism
The data logger has a specific mechanism for detecting whether or not the cap is
connected in order to prevent logging of invalid data. For example, if the logger is in
Run mode and the cap with external sensor has accidentally been removed, invalid
data may be recorded. With the cap detection mechanism, the logger is able to
determine if the cap is connected and if not, it will cease logging until the cap is
reconnected.
The mechanism functions as follows:

When disconnecting the logger from the computer USB port following Setup and
Run, Timer Run or Push to Run modes, the logger will search for the cap every
second for the duration of one minute. The logger LCD will display NC (No Cap).
If the cap is connected during this time, the logger will detect it and the LCD will
immediately switch to whichever mode was originally configured.

If the cap has not been detected after this one minute is up, the LCD will continue
to display NC and the logger will then search for the cap once every 10 minutes
until detected. If the cap was connected during the 10 minute search cycle, the
logger will only detect the cap at the end of the 10 minute cycle when it is next
schedule to perform a search.
115

After the cap is successfully detected, and while the logger is still running, it will
continue to check that the cap is connected each time it records a new sample. If
no cap is detected then it won't record the sample, and will again display NC.
10.9.
Using the MicroLite Magnet
The MicroLite includes the magnet key accessory in the logger packaging.
This magnet is used to activate the logger when in Push to Run mode, and for the
MicroLite II only, activate the logger, wake up the logger from deep sleep mode, stop
the logger, and mark a time stamp.
There is a reed relay on the MicroLite’s circuit board which is closed when placing
the magnet in the magnet holder, and depending on the duration, will trigger a
specific function.
10.10. Operating the MicroLite
This section explains how to operate the MicroLite loggers and provides an overview
of the logger functionality.
10.10.1. MicroLite Operating Modes
MicroLite is always set in one of five possible operating modes. These modes are all
activated via the DataSuite software or using the magnet key.

Stop
MicroLite is idle and is not recording. When stopping, the logger immediately
ceases to record data, instead displaying STOP on the LCD.
For MicroLite II only, to stop the logger directly from the unit, select the Stop on
key press option in the logger Setup window in DataSuite. While the logger is
running, place the magnet key in the magnet holder for at least 12 seconds. The
logger will then stop sampling. A time stamp will also be recorded for this event
and the T indication will display for 2 seconds. The LCD will then display STOP.

Run
MicroLite is recording data. It will stop recording automatically when its memory
has reached full capacity (8,000, 16,000 or 32,000 samples depending on the
model). When the memory is full the LCD displays FULL.

Cyclic Run
Similar to Run mode, but MicroLite will continuously sample data, recording over
old data when the memory reaches its capacity, beginning with the earliest data
recording. Cyclic Run mode must be selected from the logger Setup window in
DataSuite.

Timer Run
MicroLite can be configured to start recording at a predetermined time. When
MicroLite is set for such a run, its status is set to Timer Run. The logger LCD
displays tRUN.

Push to Run
MicroLite will only begin logging data when the user operates the logger’s reed
switch with the MicroLite magnet key. The logger LCD displays PUSH.
116
10.10.2. Turning on the Unit
To turn on the unit from sleep mode (the LCD and LED are both off) simply connect
the logger to the PC’s USB port, or place the magnet key in the magnet holder (for
MicroLite II only).
10.10.3. Viewing Real-time Data on LCD
When the MicroLite is sampling data the readings from the sensor are displayed on
the LCD (alternately, if more than one sensor) followed by the relevant unit e.g. C, F,
mA or V.
10.10.4. Viewing Min/Max Readings on LCD
Note: Available in MicroLite II v1.01, and DataSuite v2.2.0.0 and higher only,
Via the DataSuite software, you are able to configure the MicroLite to display
Min/Max readings from the current sampling session on the LCD immediately after
the data samples are displayed.
To enable this feature enter the logger Setup window and in the Options section,
select the Show Min/max samples on LCD checkbox.
This will show Min/Max readings calculated from the full data set. If running the
logger in cyclic memory, then the calculation will also be based on data from previous
cycles).
To show Min/Max readings from data recorded only in the last 24 hours, then select
the Only past 24h checkbox.
10.10.5. Viewing Firmware Version
For the MicroLite II only, when the logger is in Stop mode the firmware version is
displayed 2 seconds after placing the magnet key in the magnet holder. When in Run
mode, the firmware version is displayed after 5 seconds.
On the LCD screen, you will see F followed by the firmware version itself e.g. 01.01.
The firmware version can also be seen in the logger Setup window in DataSuite, or in
the logger icon tooltip in Map View.
10.10.6. Sensor Alarm Levels
Via the software, users can define minimum and maximum alarm levels for each
input individually. The MicroLite logger display indicates when any alarm level is
exceeded.
117
Note: When the MicroLite is in Cyclic mode, the Low or High alarm level displayed
represents the lowest or highest readings recorded since the logger starting logging
data, irrelevant of how many cycles the logger has recorded.
AL-L – A sensor’s reading is lower than its low alarm level.
AL-H – A sensor’s reading is higher than its high alarm level.
The alarm notification remains until the next time you change the logger setup or run
a new recording session.
10.10.7. Alarm Duration
The MicroLite I calculates the duration of an existing alarm and displays it on the
logger’s LCD. The calculation is made in hours and is indicated on the LCD as H.
For example, the shortest possible duration of 0.01H means the logger has been in
alarm for between 0 and 36 seconds.
A duration of 1.55H means the logger has been in alarm for 93 minutes (1.55 hours).
If the MicroLite is in a Low and High alarm simultaneously, then it will show the
duration for both alarms.
Even if the logger is not currently in alarm state, the duration will still be displayed if
an alarm previously occurred.
10.10.8. Marking Time Stamps
Time stamps can be used to mark a specific event such as the logger has reached its
destination, if used during to record temperature during product transportation.
For the MicroLite II only, while the logger is running, placing the magnet key in the
magnet holder for at least 2 seconds will record a new sample with a time stamp on
the logger memory.
The time stamp is visible both in the DataSuite data graph and table, and the user
can enter a comment in the table describing the event.
There is capacity for a maximum of 99 time stamps in the logger memory. When the
memory is full, the LCD will display FULL when you attempt to mark another time
stamp. To reset the Time Stamp memory, perform a new logger setup.
If running the logger in cyclic mode, time stamps marked during an earlier cycle will
not be downloaded to the software. Only time stamps from the current cycle will be
downloaded.
118
Chapter 11:
MicroLogPRO II Overview
This chapter provides a general overview of the MicroLogPRO II data loggers.
11.1.
MicroLogPRO II Introduction
Standalone, Portable, Temperature and Humidity Loggers
The MicroLogPRO II series of data loggers are used to monitor temperature and
humidity in a variety of applications, such as perishable goods and controlled
environments. Each logger can also be connected to external sensors in order to
monitor additional parameters such as voltage and current.
The license-free DataSuite software is used to operate the MicroLogPRO II data
loggers, and includes powerful tools for comprehensive data analysis.
Key MicroLogPRO II benefits include:

Accurate, portable USB data loggers

Measuring up to four parameters: Temperature, RH and Dew Point plus external
sensors

External sensors include: Temperature, 4-20 mA, 0-10 V

Connects with industry standard sensors

Unique Boomerang feature that automatically creates and emails PDF data report
when logger is connected to PC

Feature-rich software for data monitoring, analysis and logger calibration

Low power consumption, with up to 2-year battery life, ideal for long-haul
monitoring

Multi-function keypad supporting manual time stamp and Push to Run modes

View up to 30 days Min/Max data history on LCD screen

Water and dust proof, depending on logger model

Records months of data - up to 52,000 samples

Built-in LED for logging and alarm indication
11.2.
MicroLogPRO II Packaging
MicroLogPRO II data logger
The data logger package contains the following items:

One data logger, of part number EC800 or EC850

One nylon bag containing one screw + screw anchor, for wall mounting
DataSuite software
The software is used to configure the data logger as well as analyze the data
following download to PC. The software package is purchased separately to the data
logger and contains:
119

One DataSuite CD, including user documentation

One mini-USB cable for connecting the MicroLogPRO II to the PC
11.2.1. The Data Logger
There are two data logger models in the MicroLogPRO II system.

EC800: Internal NTC Temperature sensor + one external input

EC850: Internal Digital Temperature and Humidity sensors + one external input
The MicroLogPRO II can be used as a standalone device to monitor temperature and
humidity levels. It can also be connected via USB cable to the PC for online, realtime data streaming to the DataSuite software.
The MicroLogPRO II continuously displays the most recent samples, along with the
maximum and minimum values for a selected time interval. Users can also define
minimum and maximum alarm levels via the software for a specific shipment, for
example, and the LCD screen will show alarm icons if either level is breached.
The logger two-button keypad is used to activate and stop the device, mark a time
stamp, and display min/max values.
The data stored by the logger can be downloaded to any computer with DataSuite
installed, for further viewing and analysis, and can also be exported to an Excel
spreadsheet.
The data logger is programmed to consume as little power as possible during
operation, in order to conserve the battery life. When not recording data the units are
placed in deep sleep mode and they wake up upon key press.
The battery for the MicroLogPRO II is easily replaceable and can run up to two years,
depending on the logger configuration and operating conditions.
Note: Battery life depends on the logger sampling rate, type of sensor, and number
of measured sensors.
120
MicroLogPRO II Data Loggers
Part Number: EC800
Part Number: EC850
One internal NTC temperature sensor
with external input and USB PC
interface
Memory Capacity: 52,000 samples
Two internal digital and humidity
temperature sensors with external
input and USB PC interface
Memory Capacity: 52,000 samples
Power supply: Battery operated
Power supply: Battery operated
11.2.2. Hardware Accessories
The only accessory required for the MicroLogPRO II system is the mini-USB cable
for connecting the device to the PC.
121
Chapter 12:
MicroLogPRO II Implementation
Guide
Fourtec recommends first time users of the MicroLogPRO II system read this chapter
before drilling down into the many features of the system described later in the user
guide. The Implementation Guide will give you a clear understanding of the basic
aspects of setting up the system, and getting the data logger up and running.
12.1.
Pre-setup Requirements
Prior to commencing with the MicroLogPRO II implementation you must have the
following requirements in place:
PC

24/7 availability, if online data monitoring is required

Reliable AC power

Sufficient hard disk space to store loggers’ data

One free USB port
MicroLogPRO II devices
At least one MicroLogPRO II logger EC800 or EC850.
Mini-USB cable
The mini-USB cable connects the data logger to the PC for logger configuration and
data download (and is supplied with the DataSuite software kit).
12.2.
Launching the Software
1. Install the DataSuite software on the PC workstation. Refer to section ‎17.1:
Installing DataSuite Software on page 150 for more details.
2. Once the software and associated components have been installed, launch
DataSuite from your DataSuite desktop shortcut
3. The main DataSuite window is launched. The default view is called Map View.
122
4. Check for DataSuite updates. Go to Help > Check for Updates from the
DataSuite main menu to check for newer versions of the MicroLogPRO II module
software and firmware released since you purchased your system. For more
details on the Update feature go to ‎Chapter 18: Updating DataSuite Software and
Firmware.
12.3.
Connecting the Logger
Note: Multiple MicroLogPRO II loggers may be detected by the PC at a time.
1. Only once the DataSuite software has been installed, connect the MicroLogPRO
II data logger to the mini-USB cable. Connect this cable to the computer.
2. Assuming this is the first time the logger is used following purchase, it will be in
deep sleep mode. When connected to the PC, the logger will automatically turn
on.
To turn on the logger when disconnected from the PC, press the Min/Max Hours
button
on the front keypad.
3. When turned on the LCD will display Hello followed by the logger model part
number, firmware version and finally, Stop.
4. When first detected by the DataSuite software, the logger icon will appear in the
Map View. If the logger icon does not appear, from the DataSuite main menu, go
to Devices > Detect Device.
Figure 52: Adding data logger icon to Map View
123
Note: If the logger is not recognized by the software try connecting the mini-USB
cable to another USB port on the PC. Ensure the unit is turned on and select
Devices > Detect Device again in the main menu.
5. Should you disconnect the logger’s USB cable the logger icon will be grayed out:
.
Note: You can move the logger icon elsewhere on the screen by going to Tools >
Lock Map View and unselecting this option.
12.4.
Loading Map View Background
Load an image into the DataSuite software showing a map of your facility in order to
place the Logger icons in their relative positions. As you deploy more standalone
loggers, this will prove very helpful.

Double click the Map View background to browse to the image directory and load
the image. Remember to unlock the Map View in order to move the icons around.

Right-click the Map View background and two options will be available: Load
Wallpaper and Reset Wallpaper, which resets to the default Fourtec wallpaper.
12.5.
Configuring the Logger
Once the software has detected the MicroLogPRO II logger, you must configure the
unit in order to start acquiring data.
1. Right-click on the Logger icon. Select Setup from the context menu.
2. The Setup window will be launched.
Figure 53: MicroLogPRO II Logger Setup window
124
This dialog provides non-editable information such as the serial number, battery
level, model number and firmware version of the current unit.
On the Properties and Sensors tabs, the user is able to configure the following
parameters:
 Unit's comment
 Sampling rate
 Activation and memory modes
 Deep sleep mode
 Averaging points
 Temperature units °C/°F (on the logger LCD)
 Active sensors
 Alarm levels
 Alarm delay
3. In the Properties tab:
a. Select the memory mode: Cyclic or non-Cyclic
b. Select the activation mode: Push to Run, Timer Run or leave the checkboxes
unmarked for immediate activation.
c. If you want the ability to stop the logger during operation, select the ‘Stop on
key press’ option.
d. Select the sampling rate anywhere from 1 every second to 1 every 18 hours.
Refer to the Recording Time to ensure the logger won’t stop or begin cyclic
recording before the end of your specific measurement session.
e. Select the Deep sleep mode checkbox to run the logger in deep sleep mode.
While in Stop mode, the logger will shut down after two minutes of inactivity
and enter deep sleep in order to conserve battery. To wake up from deep
sleep, the Min/Max hour button must be pressed.
If deep sleep mode is not selected the logger will always stay on, and
consume more battery. However, it can be connected to USB and not require
pressing the keypad to wake up.
Note: This feature is only available in firmware v1.01 or higher
4. In the Sensors tab:
a. Select the internal and external sensors you wish to activate during the
current logging session.
b. If you require alarm levels, select the relevant checkboxes and enter the
specific threshold values.
5. In the Display tab:
a. Select the appropriate option for the LCD screen. If you wish to conserve
battery life, and do not require a permanent visual data display, select the
options to turn on the LCD screen only for alarms or button press.
6. In the Boomerang Report tab:
a. Enable the Boomerang feature via this tab. Enter contacts to receive the data
report via email when logger is connected to another computer with DataSuite
installed. Refer to section ‎17.25 for more details.
7. From any of the tabs, click Setup and Run to begin logging or Setup if you wish
to run the logger later.
125
8. The Logger icon will appear as follows when in Run mode:
.
9. To stop the logger, right-click the Logger icon and select Stop from the context
menu.
Note: Running the logger clears the logger memory. All previously recorded data will
be erased when you begin a new logging session.
12.6.
Viewing Data
Once you run the logger, you have several ways of viewing the online data that is
being acquired.

Online graph/table/statistics views

Logger icon tooltip

Sensor view
12.6.1. Online Data Views
Double clicking the Logger icon or selecting Display Data in the Logger icon context
menu will open the online graph.
This graph is updated in real-time with the newly recorded data.
You can switch between Graph, Table and Statistics views to view the data in
different formats.
Figure 54: Online data – Graph view
126
Figure 55: Online data – Table view
Figure 56: Online data – Statistics view
12.6.2. Logger Tooltip
Close the online data window and return to Map View. Scroll over the Logger icon
and you will see a tooltip displaying the relevant logger information, including realtime data.
Figure 57: Logger tooltip
This tool-tip is updated with every newly recorded sample.
12.6.3. Sensor View
Click the Sensor View icon
in the tool bar to switch to this view. Here, you can
monitor the data by viewing data display of each individual sensor, rather than of
each logger.
127
Figure 58: Sensor view

If the sensor is in alarm, the sensor box will change color from green to red (just
as the Logger icon would).

Double-clicking the individual sensor box will open the data in the online Graph
view.
12.7.
Downloading Data
If the logger is being used as a standalone device you will have to connect it to the
computer via USB cable in order to download the data to the software.
1. Connect logger to PC and go to Devices > Detect Device in the main menu.
2. Data download should begin automatically. To manually download data right-click
the logger icon and select Download Data.
3. View the downloaded data by double-clicking the logger icon.
128
Chapter 13:
MicroLogPRO II Hardware Overview
This chapter details the hardware features of the MicroLogPRO II data loggers.
13.1.
Data Logger Front Panel Layout
LCD screen
Cradle for wall mounting
Min/Max Hours button
External sensor input
Mini-USB input
Bi-color LED
Figure 59: EC800 data logger front panel
LCD screen
Cradle for wall mounting
Min/Max Days button
Min/Max Hours button
Mini-USB input
External sensor input
RH/Temp sensor
location
Bi-color LED
Figure 60: EC850 data logger front panel
LCD screen
Displays logger status, logger data, alarm level, Min/Max values and engineering
units.
Min/Max Hours button
Use to view Min/Max values going back 24 hours. Also used to wake up logger from
sleep mode.
Min/Max Days button
Use to view Min/Max values going back 30 days. Also used together with Min/Max
Hours button to perform other logger functionality.
129
Bi-color LED
Green and red LED Indicates activation, logging and alarm status
Cradle for wall mounting
Use the cradle to mount the logger on a wall for stationary operation. Screws are
provided in the accessories kit.
13.2.
Data Logger External Connections
External connections of the EC800 and EC850 are exactly the same.
External sensor
input
Mini-USB
Figure 61: EC800 and EC850 external connections
Mini USB Port
To enable communication between logger and PC, for configuration and
data download.
Sensor Inputs
3-pin socket supporting range of MicroLogPRO II external sensor
adapters and probes
Note: The MicroLogPRO II ships with a rubber plug that covers each of
the external sockets. The plug protects the sockets from moisture and
dust. Unless you are using the sockets, leave the plugs in.
13.3.
Data Logger Sensor Overview
This section provides an overview of the hardware specifications of the
MicroLogPRO II data loggers.
130
13.3.1. Internal Sensor Types
The EC800 and EC850 loggers include internal sensors, depending on the logger
model.
Sensor
Measurement
Range
Accuracy
Logger
Model
Digital Humidity
5% to 95%
±2%
EC850
Digital
Temperature
-40 ºC to 80 ºC
±0.3 ºC
EC850
Temperature
NTC
-40 ºC to 80 ºC
±0.3 ºC
EC800
13.3.2. External Sensor Types
The EC800 and EC850 each has one external input, for connection to a range of
adapters and probes.
Measurement
Range
Adapter/Probe
Accuracy
Current Adapter
4 to 20 mA
± 20 µA
Voltage Adapter
0 to 10 V
± 5 mV
Temperature NTC 10K Probe
-50 to 110 ºC
±0.3 ºC
13.3.3. User Defined Sensors
DataSuite software provides a simple and straightforward tool for defining a limited
number of custom sensors. Almost any sensor or transducer with 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20
mA output is accepted by the MicroLogPRO II loggers, using the appropriate adapter.
Electrical units are automatically scaled to meaningful user-defined engineering units.
The sensor definitions are stored in the logger’s memory and are added to the
sensors list in the Setup window.
The logger LCD supports the following units for user-defined sensors: PSI, bAr, PH,
mS, and PPm. These are displayed together with the scaled values.
All types of user-defined units are displayed in the DataSuite software.
Refer to section ‎17.8.1 for more details.
13.3.4. Sensor Alarms
Via the software, users can define minimum and maximum alarm levels for each
input individually. The MicroLogPRO II logger display indicates when the sensor
reading is in alarm of any type. The symbols AL-H and AL-L are used in addition to
the LED alarm indicator.
13.3.5. Sensor Calibration
All MicroLogPRO II loggers may be calibrated via the DataSuite software. The
calibration parameters are sent to the data loggers via USB connection and stored in
the logger’s memory. Refer to section ‎17.20 for more details.
131
13.4.
Unit Serial Number and Comment
Every MicroLogPRO II data logger unit is embedded with a unique serial number.
The data logger only can be loaded with a descriptive comment to identify its task
and location. You may add or edit the logger comment via the DataSuite software.
Every time data is transferred to the computer it is labeled both with the logger’s
serial number and comment and is displayed in the graph or data table view.
The unit serial number is also marked on a sticker on the back of the product.
13.5.
Power Supply
The MicroLogPRO II data loggers run from one internal, replaceable 2/3 AA 3.6 V
lithium battery. Depending on the logger configuration and operating conditions, from
a new battery, the data logger can run for up to 2 years.
Note: When connected to the PC via USB, the logger will draw its power via the USB
port and not via the internal battery.
13.5.1. Battery Level Indication
The MicroLogPRO II battery level indication is viewed as follows:

On the logger LCD *

In the DataSuite logger Setup dialog and logger icon tooltip in Map View
* EC800/EC850 Rev B, firmware v2.00 or higher only
Battery Level on Logger LCD

4-segment battery icon is displayed on the logger LCD (it is always displayed)
The definition of each segment is:
 3 segments: 100%
 2 segments: 50 > 99%
 1 segment: 25 > 49%
 0 segments: 0 > 24%
Measurement of Battery Voltage
The battery voltage is measured as follows:

Each time the device is removed from the USB and is updated in the software
upon reconnection to PC.

When the logger is in Run mode and not connected to the USB, it is measured
every hour and recorded to the logger memory. When reconnected to USB,
DataSuite takes the last battery reading recorded to memory.
132
Recognizing when MicroLogPRO II Battery needs Replacing
If the MicroLogPRO II LCD shuts off immediately upon PC disconnection, this means
that the logger battery must be replaced. The logger is powered via USB when
connected to the PC, so the LCD will always turn on even if the battery is empty or
missing. The DataSuite software does not take a measurement of the battery voltage
when the logger is connected to the USB, so it will not provide indication that the
battery is actually 0%.
Note: Following firmware upgrade from v1.31 to v2.00, the battery reading in
DataSuite will be viewed as NA, until the device is removed from the USB and
reconnected to the PC. The correct battery reading will then be displayed.
13.5.2. Battery Life
In optimal conditions, the battery’s maximum lifespan can range from between one to
two years. The MicroLogPRO II is able to conserve battery life by placing itself in
sleep mode between data recordings. While in sleep mode, the data logger
consumes a minimal amount of power. The MicroLogPRO II will then wake up for a
few micro-seconds whenever it has to record a data sample or display new data on
the LCD screen.
You always have the option of disabling the LCD during logging, only to turn on
during alarm state. Refer to section ‎17.17.4 for more details.
13.5.3. Replacing the Battery
Note: Removing the logger battery will result in logger memory being erased but the
setup configuration will be retained.
1. Unfasten the three screws on the back of the MicroLogPRO II.
2. Carefully remove the back cover.
3. Replace the battery, and be sure to insert the new battery into the correct
corresponding polarities.
4. Refasten the three screws on the back of the MicroLogPRO II.
13.6.
USB Communication Cable
A mini-USB communication cable is supplied as part of the DataSuite software kit.
This cable connects the MicroLogPRO II data logger to the DataSuite PC
workstation. When connected to the PC the logger can communicate with the
software for configuration and data download purposes, for example.
The USB cable also powers the logger when connected to the PC but it does not
charge the internal battery.
Type B plug
Connect to PC USB port
Type A plug
Connect to logger USB port
Figure 62: USB communication cable
133
13.7.
LCD Overview
The MicroLogPRO II has a 4-digit 7-segment LCD screen, which is able to display
the following information:

The sensor reading currently recorded

Sensor reading of up to three decimal places (if the reading integer is less than
10 e.g. 2.543 V) *

If logger is in Stop, Timer Run or Push to Run modes

Low or High alarm indication

Min/Max readings

Full logger memory status

Marking of a time stamp

External Cap is not connected (external input models only)

Battery level *
* EC800/EC850 Rev B, firmware v2.00 or higher only
13.7.1. LCD Status Messages

USB – Indicates that the logger is connected to the PC via USB cable

Stop - The logger is currently in Stop mode, not sampling data

Run – Visible immediately before the logger is about to start sampling data, once
the Run command was sent.

Push – Indicates the logger is in Push to Run mode, as configured in the logger
Setup window. Press both logger buttons for 3 seconds to start running.

tRUN - Indicates the logger is in Timer Run mode, as configured in the logger
Setup window.

T01, T02, etc. – Indicates that a time stamp has been taken, by pressing both
logger buttons for over 2 seconds while running.
13.7.2. LCD Mode of Operation
In the Display tab in the logger Setup window the user has the option to define
several modes of operation for the LCD screen when sampling.

Always On: The LCD will never turn off

LCD is off, and will turn on for 30, 60 or 120 seconds upon alarm or key press
In addition, when the logger is not sampling (in Stop mode) the LCD will shut down
after two minutes of inactivity in order to conserve battery life.
13.8.
LED Overview
The MicroLogPRO II features a LED primarily to give real-time indication of alarm
and activation.
134

Sample with alarm – The LED will flash red at ten second intervals once an
alarm is recorded, until the logger memory is cleared, and only in Run mode.

Sample without alarm – The LED will flash green every ten seconds, as long as
the logger is in Run mode.

Connected to USB – The LED will permanently indicate green as long as the
unit is connected to the computer via USB and in Stop mode.

Turning on the unit – The LED will flash orange for one second when it is turned
on from sleep mode.

Marking a time stamp – The LED will flash green when a time stamp is marked,
as it is recording a new sample to the logger memory.
13.9.
Operating the MicroLogPRO II
This section explains how to operate the MicroLogPRO II loggers and provides an
overview of the logger functionality.
13.9.1. MicroLogPRO II Operating Modes
MicroLogPRO II features the following operating modes:

Stop – MicroLogPRO II is idle and is not sampling.
 To stop the logger via the logger keypad itself, when in Run or Timer Run
modes, select the Stop on key press option in the logger Setup window.
Pressing both left and right buttons together for 15 seconds will stop the
logger. A time stamp will also be recorded for this event and the T indication
will display for 2 seconds. The LCD will then display STOP.

Run – MicroLogPRO II is sampling data and recording to its internal memory. It
will stop recording automatically when its memory has reached full capacity
(52,000 samples with one sensor). When the memory is full, the LCD displays
FULL.

Cyclic Run – Similar to Run mode, but the logger will record over the old data
when the memory is full, beginning with the earliest data recording. This option is
available in the Setup window.

Timer Run – The logger can be configured to start recording at a predetermined
time. When the logger is set for such a run, its status is set to Timer Run and is
indicated as tRUN on the LCD.

Push to Run – The logger will only begin logging data when the user pushes
both of the unit’s buttons for 3 seconds.

Marking a Time Stamp
 When the logger is running, pressing both logger buttons for over 2 seconds
will record a new sample with a time stamp on the logger memory.
 Each time stamp can mark a specific event such as the logger has reached its
destination, if used during to record temperature during product
transportation.
 The time stamp is visible both in the DataSuite data graph and table, and the
user can enter a comment in the table describing the event.
 There is capacity for a maximum of 99 time stamps in the logger memory.
When the memory is full, the LCD will display FULL when both buttons are
135
pressed together for over two seconds. To reset the Time Stamp memory,
perform a new logger setup.
 If running the logger in cyclic mode, time stamps marked during an earlier
cycle will not be downloaded to the software. Only time stamps from the
current cycle will be downloaded.
13.9.2. Turning on the Unit
To turn on the unit from deep sleep mode (the LCD and LED are both off) simply
press the Min/Max Hours button for over one second.
If the unit is in sleep mode, whereby the logger is running or in Stop mode but the
LCD is off, connecting the unit to the PC via USB or pressing the Min/Max Hours
button will turn the unit on.
13.9.3. Logger Sleep Mode
The MicroLogPRO II battery’s long lifespan is achieved by putting the logger to sleep
between recordings. After 2 minutes of inactivity in Stop mode the logger will enter
deep sleep. To wake up a unit from deep sleep, press the Min/Max Hours button.
While in sleep mode, the data logger consumes a minimal amount of power in order
to extend the battery life.
Deep sleep mode can be disabled via the logger Setup window by unselecting the
Deep sleep mode checkbox. When disabled, the logger will always stay on, and
consume more battery. However, an advantage of working in this mode is that when
connected to the PC via USB, the logger will always be automatically detected
without the need to press the keypad to wake it up.
Note: Disabling the deep sleep mode is only available in firmware v1.01 or higher,
and with DataSuite v2.2.0.0
13.9.4. Viewing Real-time Data on LCD
When MicroLogPRO II is sampling data the readings from sensors is alternately
displayed on the LCD followed by the relevant unit e.g. C or F. The data obtained
from external sensors is displayed with a small EXT icon above the reading, following
by the unit.
13.9.5. Viewing Firmware Version
From Stop Mode
When the logger is in Stop mode pressing both buttons for two seconds will display
the device’s current firmware version. F will be displayed on the LCD, followed by the
version number e.g. 2.00.
From Run Mode
When the logger is in Stop mode pressing both buttons for five seconds will display
the device’s current firmware version. After two seconds the logger will take a time
stamp and then three seconds later the firmware version will be displayed.
136
13.9.6. Displaying Minimum and Maximum Values
You can display minimum and maximum values on the LCD screen, ranging from the
last 1 - 24 hours or from the last 1 - 30 days, by using the MicroLogPRO II left and
right buttons.
Viewing Min. and Max Values in the last 1-24 Hours
1. Select the number of hours by pressing the right button on the logger keypad.
Don't release the button. The LCD will then display the hour number, ranging
from 1 to 24 days. It will scroll through the hours, starting from H 1, H 2, and so
on. Once you’ve reached the desired number, release the right button.
2. Once the right button is released, the logger will display the Min and Max values
of the sensors for the selected time period, including Dew Point.
Viewing Min. and Max Values for the last 1-30 Days
1. Select the number of days by pressing the left button on the logger keypad. Do
not release the button. The LCD will then display the day number, ranging from 1
to 30 days. It will scroll through the days, starting from d 1, d 2, and so on. Once
you’ve reached the desired number, release the left button.
2. Once the left button is released, the logger will display the Min and Max values of
the sensors for the selected time period, including Dew Point.
13.9.7. Sensor Alarm Levels
Via the software, users can define minimum and maximum alarm levels for each
input individually. The MicroLogPRO II logger display indicates when any alarm level
is exceeded.
Note: When the MicroLogPRO II is in Cyclic mode, the Low or High alarm level
displayed represents the lowest or highest readings recorded since the logger
starting logging data, irrelevant of how many cycles the logger has recorded.
AL-L – A sensor’s reading is lower than its low alarm level.
AL-H – A sensor’s reading is higher than its high alarm level.
The alarm notification remains until the next time you change the logger setup or run
a new recording session.
137
Chapter 14:
PicoLite Overview
This chapter provides a general overview of the PicoLite data logger.
14.1.
PicoLite Introduction
PicoLite Data Logger
Part Number: PICOLITE-16K
Internal temperature sensor -40 to 40 °C
and USB interface
Memory Capacity: 16,000 samples
Power supply: Battery operated
The compact and easy-to-use disposable PicoLite USB data logger provides a
simple solution for temperature monitoring, throughout mass transportation cold
chain processes. Effective cold chain processes require control over the quality of
perishable goods and compliancy with the highest industry standards. Featuring a
built-in temperature sensor, activation button, bi-color LED and direct USB
connectivity, the PicoLite offers a plug and record solution for every application.
The PicoLite is configured by Fourtec’s intuitive DataSuite software, offering
comprehensive data analysis features and alarm notifications. By reducing overhead
related to more complex multi-trip loggers, the PicoLite meets the challenge of
combining low cost with reliability for one-trip, value-for-money data logging.
Key PicoLite benefits include:

Low cost, one-trip, disposable logger for an unbroken cold chain

Internal, high accuracy temperature sensor

Unique Boomerang feature that automatically creates and emails PDF data report
when logger is connected to PC

Direct USB interface for PC communication

16,000 sample memory accommodating long-distance transports

Software-enabled activation button to start logging and mark time stamps

Built-in bi-color LED for sampling and alarm indication
138

Supported by the complimentary DataSuite software for data analysis and alarm
notification

6-month battery life, in normal ambient conditions

Water and dust resistant IP67
14.2.
PicoLite Packaging
The PicoLite is generally shipped in carton's containing 100 units per carton, or in
smaller bundles depending on the order and reseller. There are no accessories
included in the package, just the individual unit itself.
In order to save battery life, the PicoLite's are shipped in Stop mode. This means that
before you can start sampling, you must first connect the logger to the computer and
configure it using the DataSuite software.
The shelf-life of the battery is five years, prior to first-time use.
139
Chapter 15:
PicoLite Implementation Guide
Fourtec recommends first time users of the PicoLite system read this chapter before
drilling down into the many features of the system described later in the user guide.
The Implementation Guide will give you a clear understanding of the basic aspects of
setting up the system, and getting the data logger up and running.
15.1.
Pre-setup Requirements
Prior to commencing with the PicoLite implementation you must have the following
requirements in place:
PC

24/7 availability, if online data monitoring is required

Internet connection, for sending of data reports via email (Boomerang feature)

Reliable AC power

Sufficient hard disk space to store loggers’ data

One free USB port
PicoLite devices
At least one PicoLite logger.
15.2.
Launching the Software
1. Install the DataSuite software on the PC workstation. Refer to section ‎17.1:
Installing DataSuite Software on page 150 for more details.
2. Once the software and associated components have been installed, launch
DataSuite from your DataSuite desktop shortcut
3. The main DataSuite window is launched. The default view is called Map View.
Figure 63: Main DataSuite window
140
4. Check for DataSuite updates. Go to Help > Check for Updates from the
DataSuite main menu to check for newer versions of the PicoLite module
software and firmware released since you purchased your system. For more
details on the Update feature go to ‎Chapter 18: Updating DataSuite Software and
Firmware.
15.3.
Connecting the Logger
Note: Multiple PicoLite loggers may be detected by the PC at a time.
1. Only once the DataSuite software has been installed, connect the PicoLite data
logger via the USB interface.
2. Assuming this is the first time the logger is used following purchase, it will be in
deep sleep mode. When connected to the PC, the logger will automatically turn
on.
3. When detected by the PC, the logger's green LED will stay on as long as it's
connected to the USB port.
4. When first detected by the DataSuite software, the logger icon will appear in the
Map View. If the logger icon does not appear, ensure the unit is properly
connected to the USB port and from the DataSuite main menu, go to Devices >
Detect Device.
Figure 64: Adding PicoLite logger icon to Map View
Note: If the logger is not recognized by the software try connecting the logger to
another USB port on the PC. Ensure the unit is turned on and select Devices >
Detect Device again in the main menu.
5. Should you disconnect the logger’s USB cable the logger icon will be grayed out:
.
Note: You can move the logger icon elsewhere on the screen by going to Tools >
Lock Map View and unselecting this option.
15.4.
Loading Map View Background
If relevant to the PicoLite application, you can load an image into the DataSuite
software showing a map of your facility in order to place the Logger icons in their
relative positions. As you deploy more standalone loggers, this will prove very
helpful.

Double click the Map View background to browse to the image directory and load
the image. Remember to unlock the Map View in order to move the icons around.
141

Right-click the Map View background and two options will be available: Load
Wallpaper and Reset Wallpaper, which resets to the default Fourtec wallpaper.
15.5.
Configuring the Logger
Once the software has detected the PicoLite logger, you must configure the unit in
order to start acquiring data.
1. Right-click on the Logger icon. Select Setup from the context menu.
2. The Setup window will be launched.
Figure 65: PicoLite Logger Setup window
This dialog provides non-editable information such as the serial number, battery
level, model number and firmware version of the current unit.
On the Properties and Sensors tabs, the user is able to configure the following
parameters:
 Unit's comment
 Sampling rate
 Activation and memory modes
 Averaging points
 Temperature scale °C/°F
 Alarm levels
 Alarm delay
3. In the Properties tab:
142
a. Select the memory mode: Cyclic or non-Cyclic
b. Select the activation mode: Push to Run, Timer Run or leave the checkboxes
unmarked for immediate activation.
c. Select the sampling rate anywhere from 1 every minute to 1 every 18 hours.
Refer to the Recording Time to ensure the logger won’t stop or begin cyclic
recording before the end of your specific measurement session.
4. In the Sensors tab:
a. If you require alarm levels, select the alarm checkbox and enter the specific
threshold values.
5. In the Boomerang Report tab:
a. Enable the Boomerang feature via this tab. Enter contacts to receive the data
report via email when logger is connected to another computer with DataSuite
installed. Refer to section ‎17.25 for more details.
6. From any of the tabs, click Setup and Run to begin logging or Setup if you wish
to run the logger later.
7. The Logger icon will appear as follows when in Run mode:
8. To stop the logger, right-click the Logger icon and select Stop from the context
menu.
Note: Running the logger clears the logger memory. All previously recorded data will
be erased when you begin a new logging session.
15.6.
Viewing Data
Once you run the logger, you have several ways of viewing the online data that is
being acquired.

Online graph/table/statistics views

Logger icon tooltip

Sensor view
15.6.1. Online Data Views
Double clicking the Logger icon or selecting Display Data in the Logger icon context
menu will open the online graph.
This graph is updated in real-time with the newly recorded data.
You can switch between Graph, Table and Statistics views to view the data in
different formats.
143
Figure 66: Online data – Graph view
Figure 67: Online data – Table view
Figure 68: Online data – Statistics view
15.6.2. Logger Tooltip
Close the online data window and return to Map View. Scroll over the Logger icon
and you will see a tooltip displaying the relevant logger information, including realtime data.
144
Figure 69: Logger tooltip
This tool-tip is updated with every newly recorded sample.
15.6.3. Sensor View
Click the Sensor View icon
in the tool bar to switch to this view. Here, you can
have a limited data display for each connected logger's temperature input, for a sideby-side comparison.
Figure 70: Sensor view

If the sensor is in alarm, the sensor box will change color from green to red (just
as the Logger icon would).

Double-clicking the individual sensor box will open the data in the online Graph
view.
15.7.
Downloading Data
If the logger is being used as a standalone device you will have to connect it to the
computer via USB in order to download the data to the software.
1. Connect logger to PC and go to Devices > Detect Device in the main menu.
2. Data download should begin automatically. To manually download data right-click
the logger icon and select Download Data.
3. View the downloaded data by double-clicking the logger icon.
145
Chapter 16:
PicoLite Hardware Overview
This chapter details the hardware features of the PicoLite data logger.
16.1.
Data Logger Layout
Temp sensor
location
Button for
Start/Mark Time
Stamp operation
Logger USB cap with
internal rubber seal
Hole for attaching
string, key chain, etc.
LED location
16.2.
PicoLite Sensor Overview
Sensor
Temperature
NTC
Measurement
Range
-40 ºC to 40 ºC
Accuracy
±0.5 ºC
16.2.1. Sensor Calibration
The PicoLite data loggers are shipped fully calibrated. However, further calibration
can be applied via the DataSuite software. The calibration parameters are sent to the
data loggers via USB connection and stored in the logger’s memory. Refer to section
‎17.20 for more details.
16.3.
Unit Serial Number and Comment
Every PicoLite data logger unit is embedded with a unique serial number.
The data logger only can be loaded with a descriptive comment to identify its task
and location. You may add or edit the logger comment via the DataSuite software.
Every time data is transferred to the computer it is labeled both with the logger’s
serial number and comment and is displayed in the graph or data table view.
The unit serial number is also marked on a sticker below the unit’s USB connector.
16.4.
PicoLite Battery
The PicoLite data loggers run from one internal, non-replaceable CR2032 3V lithium
battery. The data logger can run for up to 6 months, depending on the operating
conditions. Sampling rate has no impact on the battery life.
146
Shelf-life of the PicoLite battery prior to first–time use is at least 5 years.
The battery maintains the logger’s Real-Time Clock (RTC). The logger’s time/date
settings are synchronized with the PC when you perform a Setup.
Note: When connected to the PC via USB, the logger will draw its power via the USB
port and not via the internal battery.
16.5.
USB Connection
The PicoLite interfaces with the computer via any of its USB Host ports. No USB
driver installation is required in order to be detected by the computer and by the
DataSuite software. The software will automatically detect the device upon
connection to the PC.
When connected to the computer USB port, the logger motherboard will heat up due
to the voltage emitted from the USB port. The PicoLite temperature will likely be
affected and there will be a rise in the temperature reading by several degrees
Celsius. Once disconnected the readings return to ambient immediately.
16.6.
Operating the PicoLite
This section explains how to operate the PicoLite loggers and provides an overview
of the logger functionality.
16.6.1. PicoLite Working Modes
PicoLite is always set in one of five possible working modes. These modes are all
activated via the DataSuite software or using the logger button.
Stop
PicoLite is idle and is not recording. When stopping, the logger immediately ceases
to record data.
Run
PicoLite is recording data. It will stop recording automatically when its memory has
reached full capacity (16,000 samples).
Cyclic Run
Similar to Run mode, but PicoLite will continuously sample data, recording over old
data when the memory reaches its capacity, beginning with the earliest data
recording. Cyclic Run mode must be selected from the logger Setup window in
DataSuite.
Timer Run
PicoLite can be configured to start recording at a predetermined time. When PicoLite
is set for such a run, its status is set to Timer Run.
Push to Run
PicoLite will only begin logging data when the user pushes the blue button for three
seconds. The logger LED will flash green for approximately 4 seconds when it starts
to run.
147
16.6.2. Turning on the Unit
To turn on the unit when using it for the first time, simply connect the logger to the
PC’s USB port.
16.6.3. Viewing Firmware Version
The firmware version is displayed in the logger Setup window in DataSuite.
16.6.4. Sensor Alarm Levels
Via the software, users can define minimum and maximum alarm levels for each
input individually. The PicoLite logger LED will flash red every five seconds when any
alarm level is exceeded.
Note: When the PicoLite is in Cyclic mode, the Low or High alarm level indication
represents the lowest or highest readings recorded since the logger starting logging
data, irrelevant of how many cycles the logger has recorded.
The alarm notification remains until the next time you change the logger setup or run
a new recording session.
16.6.5. Push Button Functionality Overview
The PicoLite push button performs two tasks:

Start logging – Configured Push to Run mode from the PicoLite setup window
in DataSuite. When the unit is not connected to the PC USB port, press the
button for three seconds. The LED will then flash green for approximately four
seconds to indicate the logger has started sampling.

Mark a time stamp – At any point while the logger is sampling, press the button
for at least one second to immediately record a new sample to the logger memory
e.g. to indicate a specific event in the logged data.
16.6.6. LED Functionality Overview
The PicoLite features a bi-color red/green LED for real-time sampling and alarm
indication. Full LED functionality is described below:

Logger Connected to USB
 In Stop mode – The LED will permanently indicate green as long as the unit
is connected to the USB port.
 In Run mode – The LED will flash green every five seconds.
 In Run mode, while in alarm – The LED will flash red every five seconds.

Logger Not Connected to USB
 In Run mode – The LED will flash green every five seconds
 In Run mode, while in alarm – The LED will flash red every five seconds.
LED will continue to flash red even if logger returns to non-alarm levels, to
indicate that the device was previously in alarm.
 Marking a time stamp – The LED will flash red once when a time stamp is
marked, as it is recording a new sample to the logger memory.
148
 Push to Run mode - The LED will flash green for approximately four
seconds after the PicoLite button is pressed to commence logging
 Firmware update - The LED continually flashes green/red until process is
complete.
16.6.7. Marking Time Stamps
While the logger is running, press the blue logger button for at least one second to
record a new sample with a time stamp on the logger memory.
Each time stamp can mark a specific event such as the logger has reached its
destination, if used during to record temperature during product transportation.
The time stamp is visible both in the DataSuite data graph and table, and the user
can enter a comment in the table describing the event.
You can also mark a time stamp directly from the software when the PicoLite is
connected to the PC (right-click Logger icon > Mark Time Stamp).
Note: Whenever the PicoLite is connected to the computer while in Run mode,
DataSuite will record a time stamp to the database. When viewed in the History View
data table, the time stamp comment for this event will state: Device connected to
computer <computer name>.
This comment is only saved to the PicoLite data file on this computer not to the
logger memory itself.
149
Chapter 17:
Using the DataSuite Software
This chapter provides a detailed description of the DataSuite
software features, allowing you to configure and monitor your
Fourtec data loggers in a unified application. DataSuite
supports a range of Fourtec loggers, utilizing core functionality
of the DataSuite platform such as setup, calibration, defining
new sensors, managing Email and SMS notifications,
configuring reports, firmware updates and so on.
DataSuite supports the following Fourtec products:

DaqLink

DataNet

MicroLite I & II

MicroLogPRO II

PicoLite
17.1.
Installing DataSuite Software
Part of your product package includes a DataSuite software CD. Follow the software
installation instructions provided below.
17.1.1. System Requirements
To work with DataSuite your system should be configured according to the following
minimum specifications:
Software

Windows XP SP3, Windows Server 2003 SP2, Windows Vista or Windows 7 (32bit or 64-bit)

Minimum screen resolution: 1024 x 768 (800 x 600 not supported)
Hardware

Pentium 4, 2.0 GHz or better

512 MB RAM

250 MB available disk space for the DataSuite application
17.1.2. Language Support
DataSuite currently supports English, Chinese, French, German, Italian, Japanese,
Portuguese, Russian, and Spanish interfaces.
To toggle the software language, go to Help > Language and click the desired
language. You must then restart DataSuite for the changes to take effect.
150
17.1.3. Working with User Accounts
The software installation procedure and license activation process must both be
carried out by a user with Administrator privileges, otherwise there will be problems
accessing the software by user’s with standard non-Admin privileges.
Each specific user account that accesses the DataSuite software module can
commence trial period for that specific account. However, as soon as a user with
Administrator privileges activates the module with the unique license serial number,
then all user accounts which had previously been in Trial mode will now be fully
activated.
All users will have full access to the DataSuite module’s settings and data files.
17.1.4. Installation Procedure
Note: If you are planning to use more than one Fourtec system e.g. DataNet and
MicroLogPRO II, only one DataSuite software installation is required. Each product is
managed by a specific product module within the DataSuite modular application.
Note: Remember that the installation and activation procedures must be carried out
by a user with Administrator privileges.
Please read these instructions before proceeding with the installation process.
1. If a previous installation of DataSuite exists on the computer, you must first
uninstall it before proceeding with the installation process.
2. Insert the DataSuite software CD into your computer’s CD drive. The DataSuite
Installation Wizard automatically starts running.
3. The Wizard first installs Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5, if not already detected
on the computer. The DataSuite software requires this platform in order to run.
Follow the installation instructions to install the .NET Framework on your PC. This
step can take up to two minutes to complete. Click Finish once installation is
complete.
Note: If .NET Framework is already installed on your computer this step is
skipped.
4. The main DataSuite Installation Wizard now resumes. Follow the installation
instructions to install DataSuite on your computer. The installation process
includes a silent installation of the latest version of the Silicon Laboratories USB
driver. This driver is required for detection of the DataNet and DaqLink hardware.
5. Click Finish at the end of the installation wizard. Double click the DataSuite
shortcut on your desktop
to launch the software.
6. The Welcome to DataSuite window will open, prompting the user to activate the
relevant products before use.
151
.
7. Select the checkbox next to the product or products you intend to use. For
products requiring activation click ACTIVATE to launch the activation window.
You may also click START TRIAL to run a 30-trial prior to activating the product.
DataSuite will not detect your devices unless you select one of these two options.
Note: MicroLite, MicroLogPRO II and PicoLite are license-free and therefore don't
require activation. If using these products select the checkbox and click Next.
8. If you clicked ACTIVATE in step 11 above, the DataSuite software activation
window will open on the relevant module e.g. DaqLink.
a. You may choose to start the trial to commence the free 30-day trial period.
Click Start Trial and then click Next. The full module activation can be
completed at a later stage. For full details on activating the product refer to
section ‎17.2.
152
b. Once the trial period has started, DataSuite will detect the connected loggers.
To detect more than one product module at the same time, you must ensure
that each module is either in trial mode or activated using the unique software
serial number.
c. When completing the necessary tasks in the Activation window, click Exit to
return to the Welcome window.
9. If you did not choose to activate the product or if the product is license-free, click
Next to continue.
10. In specific versions of Windows, the user may have User Account Control (UAC)
settings activated. If so, the user will be prompted the following instructions.
Select the relevant option.
11. If you have an existing, activated DataNet installation on the same computer,
then DataSuite will detect it. You have the option to convert all data files from
these previous installations into a format recognized by DataSuite. This will allow
you to view all archived data in DataSuite as well as in the legacy software. Click
Next to convert the data, or Skip to skip this step. If you skip, you will not be able
to convert the data files later.
12. You have reached the end of the configuration process. Click Finish to launch
the application.
153
13. Once the module is launched, connect the device to a USB port on your
computer. It will automatically detect the logger as new hardware and the device
will appear as a new icon in the DataSuite Map View.
17.2.
DataSuite Software Activation
DataSuite requires certain modules to be activated using a serial number provided
with purchase of the specific DataSuite module:
 DataSuite-DN (DataNet)
 DataSuite-DQL (DaqLink)
 DataSuite-CFR (CFR module)
 DataSuite for MicroLite, MicroLogPRO II and PicoLite is free of charge and does
not require activation.
Each module can run for 30 days in Trial mode, but when this 30 period is over, the
user will not be able to operate the software until a valid serial number is registered.
Note: The software activation feature protects Fourtec’s intellectual property for both
its software and hardware.
Please note that:
 Each serial number is good for unlimited installations on a single computer. You
cannot install the software using the same serial number on another computer.
If you have replaced your computer and must reinstall DataSuite using the same
serial number, contact Fourtec Customer Support for assistance.
 Activation can be performed from the computer with DataSuite installed, or if
there is no Internet connection from that computer, then via another computer
with Internet connectivity.
 CFR module cannot be activated/placed in trial mode without a valid user ID
provided by the DatPass Admin software, which manages the DataSuite CFR
platform.
 When the trial period for the CFR module ends, DataSuite will revert to the
standard non-CFR environment unless activated.
17.2.1. Software Activation Process
Note: The software activation forms are all case sensitive. Incorrect entry will result
in invalid activation.
To activate any one of the DataSuite modules, follow the instructions below:
1. Locate the DataSuite module serial number (SN). The SN label is found on the
DataSuite box as well as on the software CD case.
Note: If you cannot locate your serial number, contact your Fourtec distributor or
Fourtec Customer Support directly.
2. Launch DataSuite. The activation wizard will open.
3. To open the activation wizard from within DataSuite go to Help > Activate.
4. From the bottom of the wizard Home screen, select one of the module buttons to
proceed to the activation screen for that module.
154
5. Three choices are presented. Select the relevant option and click Next to
proceed:
 Activation via the Internet
Select to proceed with activation on the same computer on which DataSuite is
running, ensuring it has a live Internet connection.
 Activation via an Internet connection on another computer
Select if the computer on which DataSuite is running does not currently have
Internet connectivity.
 Start trial
Select to commence the 30 day free trial period and continue working in
DataSuite.
6. After selecting one of the two available options for continuing with the activation
process, and after clicking Next in step 4 above, you will be prompted to enter the
software SN. Enter the SN and click Next.
Note: Each serial number provides a single user license for the specific module. You
cannot use a serial number already registered on another computer.
155
7. The activation process now differs, depending on which option was selected in
step 4 above. Read the relevant section below for further activation instructions.
Activation via the Internet
1. After entering the software serial number, a window requesting basic personal
information will open. Enter the mandatory fields and click Next.
Figure 71: Personal information registration window
2. DataSuite will now establish communication with the Fourtec server to complete
the activation process. If successful, a confirmation message will appear. In the
event of any problem in the activation process, please contact your Fourtec
distributor or Fourtec Customer Support.
Note: If your Internet connection is via a Proxy server, for example, then the
registration process will fail and an error message will pop up.
3. Click Close to return to the DataSuite software.
156
Activation via Internet Connection on another Computer
1. After entering the software serial number, a window providing additional
activation instructions will open.
Figure 72: Activating DataSuite from another computer
2. Follow the steps as outlined in the window.
Note: It is recommended to generate a text file containing both the Application Key
and the Web registration form URL. Press the
icon. Transfer this file to the
computer with Internet connection, as the registration process must be continued
from there.
3. Record the License Key obtained from the Web activation form. Enter it into the
License Key field in Step 1 and click Unlock.
4. DataSuite will now establish communication with the Fourtec server to complete
the activation process. If successful, a confirmation message will appear. In the
event of any problem in the activation process, please contact your Fourtec
distributor or Fourtec Customer Support.
5. Click Close to return to the DataSuite software.
157
17.3.
DataSuite CFR Module Activation and Login
Overview
Activating the DataSuite CFR module via the activation module (refer to section ‎17.2
above) will make the DataSuite environment compliant with FDA 21 CFR Part 11
regulations.
However, prior to CFR module activation (or starting the trial period) you must first
install the Fourtec DatPass Admin software, v4.0.0.0, on one other (or the same)
computer in the network. Once DatPass is installed the Admin will be required to
create a user ID which will enable DataSuite CFR users to login into the system.
Without this user ID, the DataSuite CFR will not be able to login to DataSuite.
DataSuite CFR Login Instructions
1. Prior to starting the CFR trial period or activating the CFR module, the Admin
must first install the DatPass software and create a new user ID. See DatPass
user guide for more details.
2. Once DatPass is installed and a valid user has been created, return to the CFR
activation window in DataSuite to start the trial or activate the CFR module. Once
either of these options has been selected, you must provide the path to the
DatPass database file in order to continue. Click OK.
3. Once the database path has been verified, DataSuite will restart. Upon restart,
the CFR Login dialog will open. For first time login, click New User.
Figure 73: User Login Dialog
158
4. Select the user via the drop-down menu, and proceed to enter the username and
password associated with that user profile (as created in DatPass).
Note: If the system prompts a No New Users message, then request your DataSuite
system administrator to create a new user in DatPass.
5. Click OK.
6. Once logged into the DataSuite CFR software, you will only have access to those
features for which the Administrator has granted privileges.
7. To log off from the system, go to File > Logoff. The login dialog will remain open
in case you wish to login again.
Note: Once you have activated DataSuite CFR, you cannot deactivate it and return
to a non-CFR environment.
DataSuite CFR Login with no User ID
In the event that the CFR module trial period has been started and a user ID is not
available, click the Suspend Trial button in the CFR Login window. The CFR
validation window will open up. Select the Suspend trial period option. DataSuite
will then restart in a non-CFR environment. The number of trial days remaining is
suspended.
Once DatPass is installed and a user ID is created, you can always return to the CFR
validation window and click Resume trial period to restart DataSuite and login to the
CFR environment.
17.4.
System Password
Throughout the software you will be required to enter a password to perform certain
functions such as calibration or firmware update.
Note: The default password is 1234.
To change the password:
1. In the Password dialog box, click Change Password to open the Change
Password dialog box.
2. Enter the current password in the Current Password text box.
3. Enter the new password in the New Password text box.
4. Enter the new password a second time in the Confirm New Password text box
to confirm your new password.
5. Click OK.
Note: The password must include at least 4 characters and is case sensitive.
17.5.
DataSuite Software Layout
This section provides an overview of the default DataSuite window view as well as a
guide to all of the icons available throughout the software.
The most commonly used tools and commands are displayed on two toolbars. Tools
that relate to all aspects of the program are located in the main (upper) toolbar. Tools
specific to the graphs are located on the graph (lower) toolbar.
Refer to section ‎17.5.5 for a description of these toolbars.
159
As the DataSuite platform supports several Fourtec products, the interface is
common for most of their functionality. There are several areas such as logger
configuration, where the interface differs. These differences will be detailed
throughout the chapter.
17.5.1. Map View
When DataSuite is first launched and the device detection window closes, the default
window that is opened is the Map View (see screenshot below).
This view is used to monitor the status and data of all devices currently detected by
the software. This may be via USB connection e.g. for the MicroLogPRO II, or via
wireless connection as with the DataNet system. In the case of the DataNet, the
location and network connection of all of the data loggers and Repeaters in the
network, in addition to the Receiver, is monitored from the Map View.
You can also switch to Map View at any time by clicking the Map View button
the main toolbar. In addition, the Map View can be printed.
Icons are used to represent each of the Fourtec devices, and using the mouse the
user can select specific actions to be performed on the unit.
Name tags can also be displayed for each DataNet icon on the Map View.
Figure 74: Main window - Map View desktop
Refer to section ‎17.16 for more details on working in Map View.
17.5.2. Sensor View
Clicking the Sensor View button
in the main toolbar switches the main
DataSuite window to a display where sensor data is represented in individual
windows. All sensors which are currently online will be displayed in this view. If a
logger is currently offline then its data will not be visible.
160
in
Figure 75: Main window – Sensor View
There are two modes for viewing the sensor data, which may be toggled by going to
Tools > Switch Sensor View Mode in the main menu.
 Expanded view
In this view, the logger comment, sensor type and sensor data is displayed.
 Slim view
In this view, only the sensor type and sensor data is displayed.
Sensor in Alarm
When the sensor data is in alarm, the color of the sensor window will change
according to the alarm type. There is a legend in the lower right corner of the main
window:
For example:
This screenshot indicates that the Internal Digital Temperature reading is in High
alarm, while the Internal Relative Humidity reading is at normal levels.
161
Additional Features

The sensor windows may be dragged and placed anywhere on the screen.

Double clicking the sensor window will open the Data Display window, where the
real-time sensor data is displayed in graph or table view.

When the logger is downloading data, a message in the sensor window will be
displayed.

Scrolling over the sensor window with the mouse cursor will bring up a tooltip
displaying the following data:

Network Name (for DataNet system)

Network ID (for DataNet system)

Serial number

Logger comment

Battery level


Last sample time
Sensor type and reading

Downloading data indication (when relevant)
17.5.3. History View
Note: In History View you can view data from multiple Fourtec products in the same
view. For example, compare data from DataNet loggers side-by-side with
MicroLogPRO II and DaqLink loggers.
Clicking the History View button
in the main toolbar will switch the main window
to view archived, offline data stored in the DataSuite directory on the workstation.
You must first open the archived data file by clicking Open File
on the main
toolbar. When you open the data file it will be displayed in the History View,
otherwise, the History View window will be blank.
Refer to section ‎17.14: Viewing Archived (Offline) Data on page 184 for more details
on opening files in History View.
162
Figure 76: Main window – History View
In History View, the user may view the data in graph or table format by clicking the
relevant tabs, as well as view a number of Statistics taken from the data set.
To learn the functionality of the lower graph toolbar, refer to section ‎17.5.5 below.
Note: Users of Windows 7 using right to left language settings e.g. Hebrew, may
have problems viewing the Date/Time in the DataSuite graph. This is a known
Microsoft ® bug. Until a bug fix is released, change the Regional Settings to English.
17.5.4. Data Map
The History View window also includes the Data Map pane, on the left of the window.
The Data Map displays all data sets opened in History View, saved in the current
project file, and includes nodes for each sensor in the data set.
Clicking the sensor label removes the data from the graph. When the label is black,
the data is not displayed on the graph. The sensor data plot color is matched to the
color of the sensor label in the Data Map.
Each data set is preceded by a Logger icon
, which can be expanded or
collapsed to display the associated sensor data.
Clicking the Tree icon
in the lower graph toolbar removes the Data Map pane
altogether allowing a full screen graph view.
Data Map
Figure 77: Data Map
163
17.5.5. DataSuite Toolbar Icons
This section outlines all of the toolbar icons available in the software.
Main (Upper) Toolbar Icons
Figure 78: Main toolbar icons
The main toolbar is always available at the top of the DataSuite application, no
matter what window view the user is in.
This toolbar cannot be moved or hidden.

Open file - Opens archived logger data file
stored on the PC

Map view - Switches main window to Map
view, where the units connected to the
computer are represented

Sensor view - Switches main window to
Sensor view, where data from each
running sensor is displayed in a simple
view

History view - Switches main window to
History view, where archived logger data
can be viewed and analyzed

Alarm mute/unmute - Mutes or unmutes
an audible alarm in the system when a
sensor reading has breached the userdefined alarm level

Email Alarm Notifications - Configuration
window for Email alarm notifications

SMS Alarm Notifications - Configuration
window for SMS alarm notifications

GSM Modem - Indicates if GSM modem is
connected (green icon) or disconnected
(grey icon)

Temperature unit toggle - Display all
data in Celsius

Temperature unit toggle - Display all
data in Fahrenheit

Reports Profile Manager – Opens
Reports module
164

Report Browser – Opens window for
browsing saved Reports
Table 4: Main toolbar icon list
17.5.6. Map View Icons
The following icons representing the various statuses of the devices are viewed in
Map View. Using these icons the user is aware of the status of each unit e.g.
offline/online, alarm, power, etc.
Alarm status is also indicated: Green = Normal ; Red = Alarm
DataNet Icons

Receiver is online and connected to the PC.

Receiver is offline, possibly as USB cable has been disconnected or
it was removed from external power supply (and backup battery
drained).

Logger newly acquired by network and awaiting Setup.
Running from internal battery supply.

Logger newly acquired by network and awaiting Setup.
Running from external power supply.

Logger which has received its Setup but is in Stop mode.
Running from internal battery supply.

Logger which has received its Setup but is in Stop mode.
Running from external power supply.

Logger in Run mode and running on internal battery supply.
Green indicates there are no alarms.

Logger in Run mode and running on external power supply.
Green indicates there are no alarms.

Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert.
Running from internal battery supply.

Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert.
Running from external power supply.

Logger is offline and is no longer detected on the network. Its power
supply may have failed or it’s out of range of the Receiver.

Logger is processing a command sent from the software.

Logger is downloading data.

Logger is detected by DataSuite software via direct USB
connection. Logger is in Stop mode and running from internal
165
battery supply.

Logger is detected by DataSuite software via direct USB
connection. Logger is in Stop mode and running from external
power supply.

Logger is detected by DataSuite software via direct USB
connection. Logger is in Run mode and running from internal battery
supply.

Logger is detected by DataSuite software via direct USB
connection. Logger is in Run mode and running from external power
supply.

Repeater is online and is running from external power supply.

Repeater is offline and is no longer detected on the network. Its
power supply may have failed or it’s out of range of the Receiver.

Repeater is detected by DataSuite software via direct USB
connection.
DaqLink Icons

Logger which has received its Setup but is in Stop mode.

Running from internal battery supply.
Logger which has received its Setup but is in Stop mode.
Running from external power supply.

Logger in Run mode and running on battery supply.

Green indicates there are no alarms.
Logger in Run mode and running on external power supply.
Green indicates there are no alarms.

Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert.

Running from internal battery supply.
Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert.
Running from external power supply.

Logger is offline and is no longer detected by the computer. Its
power supply may have failed or the USB cable was disconnected.

Logger is processing a command sent from the software.

Logger is downloading data.
MicroLite II Icons

Logger which has received its Setup but is in Stop mode.

Logger in Run mode. Green indicates there are no alarms.
166

Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert.

Logger is offline and is no longer detected by the computer. The
USB interface was disconnected.

Logger is processing a command sent from the software.

Logger is downloading data.
MicroLogPRO II Icons

Logger which has received its Setup but is in Stop mode.

Logger in Run mode. Green indicates there are no alarms.

Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert.

Logger is offline and is no longer detected by the computer. Its
power supply may have failed or the USB cable was disconnected.

Logger is processing a command sent from the software.

Logger is downloading data.
PicoLite Icons

Logger in Stop mode.

Logger in Run mode. Green indicates there are no alarms.

Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert.

Logger is offline and is no longer detected by the computer. The
USB interface was disconnected.

Logger is processing a command sent from the software.

Logger is downloading data.
17.5.7. Graph (Lower) Toolbar Icons
The graph toolbar is located at the bottom of the open graph view, when the user is
either in Online Data Display:
Or History View:
The toolbar cannot be moved or hidden.
167

Data Map (in History View only) – Hides or shows the Data
Map pane in the History View window.

Plot Legend (in Display Data View only) – Hides or shows
the sensor labels from the bottom of the graph.

Autoscale - Returns the data to its default scale.

Zoom in – Zooms in on the graph data.

Pan graph – Pans the graph along the x or y axis.

Select first cursor – Adds a cursor to the designated plot
on the graph

Select second cursor – Adds a second cursor to the
designated plot on the graph.

Grid – Adds a grid to the graph background

Show/Hide Time Stamp – Shows or hides the time stamp
markers on the graph

Add Custom View (in History View only) – adds the open,
customized graph view to the Data Map

Copy graph – Copies the graph to your clipboard, to be
copied to a document or spreadsheet, for example.

Graph properties – Opens the Graph Properties window.

Export to Excel – Export the open data sets to Excel
format.

Print – Opens the Print dialog. Available for graph, table
and statistics views.
Table 5: Lower graph toolbar icon list
17.5.8. Data Map Icons

Displayed internal Temperature sensor data set

Hidden internal Temperature sensor data set

Displayed internal Humidity sensor data set

Hidden internal Humidity sensor data set

Displayed external sensor data set

Hidden internal sensor data set

Displayed graph function

Hidden graph function
168

Parent node for all logger data sets. Click to expand or collapse all
child nodes.

Logger data set. Click to expand or collapse the data set containing
all measured inputs of the specific logger.

Parent node for all custom graph views. Click to expand or collapse
all child nodes.

Displayed custom graph view. When hidden the icon is grayed out.
Table 6: Data Map icons
17.6.
File Menu Items
17.6.1. Open
Select Open to access archived data files for each logger in your network.
Shortcuts: You can also click the Open icon
files.
or press Ctrl+O to open archived
17.6.2. Open Project File
Opens project files of offline data, containing data from one or more loggers, as
opposed to standard data files containing data from only one logger.
17.6.3. Save Project
Saves multiple data sets and custom graph views into a single Project File. Only
available in History View.
17.6.4. Save Project As
Saves an existing Project file under a different name.
17.6.5. Backup System Files
This feature allows the user to backup system data and configuration files for all
DataSuite modules to a defined path on the local computer, network or USB memory
stick.
Backing up these files to a secure location will ensure that in the event of damage to
the computer hard disk, for example, you will be able to restore the critical files
containing all the device data and configurations of the DataSuite itself. It will also
enable you to setup mirror installations using the same devices.
17.6.6. Restore System Files
Once the system files have been backed up, use this feature to restore them to the
DataSuite workstation or to another computer.
169
17.6.7. Print Map View
Prints the current Map View with all unit icons, including their network paths and
name tags.
17.6.8. Exit
Exits the DataSuite application.
17.7.
DataNet Network Menu Items
This menu is specifically for DataNet users and applies to all DataNet networks
currently detected by the software. Additional Network menu items are accessible via
the Receiver context menu, by right-clicking the Receiver icon in Map View.
17.7.1. Show All Network Paths
While in Map View, enable this option to display the path that the RF signal of all
units in the network takes to reach the Receiver. If Repeaters are used in the network
it will show the signal routed via the Repeater, en route to the Receiver.
The paths are color-coded so you can also see the transmission strength. A legend
appears at the bottom of the window.

Red = Low (0 to 23% strength)

Yellow = Medium (23 to 56%)

Green = High (56 to 100%)
You can also enable this feature for specific loggers by opening the context menu on
the Logger icon in Map View and selecting Show Network Paths.
17.7.2. Refresh All Network Connections
Use this feature to send a command to all Receivers to re-establish connection to the
end units in its specific network. This is useful when wanting to ensure the network
connectivity is performing optimally without any delay or lag due to changes in
environmental conditions or location of the end units. Such delays can explain logger
170
icons not displaying the correct information or commands not being sent promptly to
the end units.
Note: The software automatically refreshes the network connections every 10
minutes.
17.8.
Tools Menu Items
17.8.1. Define Sensor
DataSuite enables the user to define custom sensors. This is a useful tool for when
the data logger is communicating with many sensor types from different vendors.
Any additional sensor that you would like to connect to the logger must comply with
the following restrictions:
The sensor’s output must be either voltage in the range of 0 to 1 V, 0 to 50 mV,
current in the range of 4 to 20 mA or Pulse in the range of 0 to 65535 pulses.
1. Click Tools > Define New Sensor and the Define New Sensor dialog will open.
Figure 79: Define New Sensor dialog
2. Click New to enable the fields.
3. Select the Base sensor from the drop-down menu (depending on whether your
sensor’s output is 0 to 1 V, 0 to 50 mV, 4 to 20mA, or measuring pulses).
4. If you wish to configure a defined sensor for the EC8XX or MicroLite II models,
make sure to select the base sensor corresponding to the specific logger model.
5. Enter the sensor name and sensor unit.
171
6. Enter two calibration values (two real values and the corresponding output values
of the sensor).
7. Click Save.
8. To make any changes to the existing sensor definitions, stand on the sensor
name and click Edit. Otherwise, click New to define additional sensors or click
Close to exit the dialog.
To use the custom defined sensor:
1. Enter the Setup dialog for the data logger you want to configure.
2. Select the Input you wish to use and from the Sensor Type drop-down menu,
select the custom sensor, which now appears in this list.
3. Proceed with the setup as you would normally do.
17.8.2. Switch Sensor View Mode
While in Sensor View, selecting this option will switch the sensor view between large
and small window sizes. By reducing the size of the sensor window you display only
the sensor type and sensor data. Enlarging the size of the sensor window will display
sensor type, sensor data and logger name.
17.8.3. Lock Map View
While in Map View, with Lock Map View selected the Map View icons are in a fixed
position and can’t be moved. You must unselect this option in order to freely move
the icons anywhere on the screen. This is essential if working with a custom
background image.
17.8.4. Options Menu
Refer to section ‎17.9 for more details.
17.8.5. Manage Contacts
The Manage Contacts dialog is where the user can add, edit and remove all contacts
and groups to which DataSuite Reports and Email/SMS notifications are sent.
Refer to section ‎17.19.1 for more details regarding managing Contacts, and to
section ‎17.19.2 for more details regarding managing Groups.
17.8.6. Email Alarm Notifications
The Email Alarm Notifications dialog is where the user can configure all notifications
to be sent via Email to a predefined contact list. Refer to section ‎17.19 for details.
17.8.7. SMS Alarm Notifications
The SMS Alarm Notifications dialog is where the user can configure all notifications
to be sent via SMS to a predefined contact list. Refer to section ‎17.19 for details.
172
17.8.8. Firmware Update Center
The Firmware Update Center is where the device firmware updates are managed.
Please refer to section ‎18.2 for more details.
17.9.
Tools > Options Menu Items
The Options dialog is divided into four main tabs:

Preferences

Device Settings

Email Settings

SMS Settings
17.9.1. Preferences Tab
Figure 80: Options > Preferences tab
The Preferences tab includes the following options:
173
Minimize application to system tray
When this checkbox is selected, the DataSuite icon
will appear in the
computer’s system tray in the lower right of the screen when the application is
minimized. Simply double-click the icon to maximize the application to full screen.
Run application on Windows Startup
When this option is selected DataSuite will automatically launch upon Windows
startup. This feature is useful in the event where the computer unexpectedly resets
and when it restarts, DataSuite will launch and online monitoring of the connected
devices will be able to continue.
Note: If running Windows Vista, User Account Control (UAC) must be turned off for
this feature to work. If UAC is off then DataSuite will not launch on Windows startup.
Map View background
Use this option to toggle between Stretch and Center views for the background
image used in Map View.
Set number of decimal places for…
For each logger sensor, internal or external, you may choose to display the data in
the software with a resolution of up to and including 4 decimal places.
Date format
Choose between five date formats to be used throughout the software when
displaying data e.g. in the Graph display.
Ignore regional settings when exporting to CSV
Selecting this option will ensure that data will be corrected exported to a CSV file and
will not use any custom regional settings in the Windows OS which might adversely
affect the layout of the data in the CSV file.
Application data files path
The default path for saving all data recorded by the data loggers is:

Default path on WinXP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Fourtec\DataSuite\Data Files\

Default path on Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\ Fourtec \DataSuite\Data Files\
Click Browse to change this path e.g. to a network path.
Save text data files
Select this checkbox if you would like DataSuite to also save the logger data to a text
file. This will allow you to export the data, in csv format, to another application that
can display the logger data.

Default path on WinXP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Fourtec\DataSuite\Text Files.
174

Default path on Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Fourtec\DataSuite\Text Files
Click Browse to change this path e.g. to a network path.
Note: The text file cannot be updated with logger data as long as it is open. Make
sure to close the file when you finish inspecting the data, or copy the file to another
location and view it from there. Alternatively, open the file in Read-only mode.
Path for Report files
The default path where Report files are stored is:

Default path on WinXP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Fourtec\DataSuite\Reports.

Default Path on Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Fourtec\DataSuite\Reports\
Click Browse to change this path e.g. to a network path.
Default Paths
If the user has modified any of the default data file or report paths e.g. to a network
path, and should this path become available for any reason, then the DataSuite
application will automatically refer to the default path as shown under the Default
Paths heading.
This precaution is necessary as otherwise DataSuite cannot download any data from
the data loggers if the data file path is not available. Data can therefore be lost.

Default path on WinXP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Fourtec\DataSuite\

Default path on Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Fourtec\DataSuite\
17.9.2. Device Settings Tab
175
Download data on application startup
Select this checkbox if you want to have automatic download of data when the
DataSuite software is launched. If there are many loggers in the system with fast
sampling rates, then the download could burden the network. Therefore in some
cases disabled this feature is advised.
Generate and send Boomerang reports automatically
Select this checkbox to enable the Boomerang feature to run automatically when a
Boomerang-enabled logger is connected to the computer. By default, this option is
enabled, so that the PDF data report is generated and Emailed as soon as the logger
is detected by the DataSuite software.
Email/SMS DataNet Offline Receiver and Reception Alarm Delay
To prevent alarm notifications being sent unnecessarily for DataNet units which
momentarily get disconnected from the network, the user can define an alarm delay
for Email and SMS notifications. The RF environment as well as the network
behavior are very dynamic and can result in very brief instances of units going offline.
In addition, if the Receiver USB cable is disconnected, or the unit is turned off for any
reason (and therefore the USB connection is lost), an alarm will be sounded. By
adding a delay you can mitigate any false alarms.
The alarm delay can be defined from between one minute to 24 hours, with a
resolution of one minute.
If the DataSuite software is shutdown during a period when alarm delay is being
timed i.e. after a unit has gone offline, then the time stamp when the unit went offline
will be recorded. When the software is reopened if the period of the alarm delay has
already passed then an Email/SMS notification will be sent.
If the alarm delay period has not passed then the SMS/Email message will be
initiated only if the time delay is reached.
17.9.3. Email Settings Tab
DataSuite’s alarm notification feature enables sending of Emails to notify the user of
any alarm in the system.
Clicking the Emails Settings tab will show the following window:
DataSuite includes one default email account, embedded into the software. It is
called Default Profile (based on Gmail POP3 server settings). It cannot be removed.
176
This means that even if you don’t configure any email account, you are still able to
send Email alarm notifications and Boomerang data reports using this profile.
1. To edit existing Email profiles or add a new one, click Edit.
The following window is opened:
Figure 81: Options > Email Settings tab
You can view the Profile settings here. Note that the Default profiles are uneditable.
2. To add a new custom profile, click Add. A new entry named New Profile is
created. Click on this entry to edit the settings, server information, etc. Make sure
to enter the fields correctly e.g. with no extra spaces or typos.
3. When finished, click OK to return to the main Email Settings window, displaying
the list of profiles.
4. To remove a profile from the Profile List, click Remove from the Email Profile
Manager window. Note that the default profile cannot be removed.
Note: DataSuite supports SMTP and MIME encoding, and POP3 mail protocols.
Sending a Test Email
To send a test Email to verify the Email configuration is correct:
1. Once the Email profile configuration is complete click Test Email to open the
Contact Information dialog.
2. Select a contact from the DataSuite contact list or enter an Email address. Click
OK to send the test Email.
3. The test Email will contain the following content:
Subject: Test message sent from the DataSuite software
177
Body: This is a test message sent from the DataSuite software. Sent on the
dd/mm/yy mm:hh
17.9.4. SMS Settings Tab
DataSuite’s alarm notification feature enables sending of SMS’s to notify the user of
any alarm in the system. First select the Send SMS notifications check box. Using
the SMS feature requires connection of a GSM modem and SIM card to the
DataSuite PC, or even just a cellular phone with an active SIM card.
You must select the COM port which the GSM modem/cellular phone is connected to
in order for the software to detect it.
Note: When using a cellular phone as a modem, ensure that the PC software suite is
disabled before connecting the phone to the PC com port. Otherwise the com port
will not be available for the DataSuite software.
Once the configuration is complete, DataSuite will be able to send SMS’s to
predefined SMS contacts when your loggers have breached certain alarm levels.
Refer to section ‎17.17.2 for setting Alarm levels on the logger and to section ‎0 for
managing the SMS alarm notifications.
Figure 82: Options > SMS Settings tab
178
Note: Once the GSM modem is online you will see the green GSM icon
in the DataSuite upper toolbar.
appear
Sending a Test SMS
To send a test SMS to verify the SMS configuration is correct:
1. Once the SMS configuration is complete and the GSM modem has been detected
by the software, the Test SMS button will be enabled.
2. Click Test SMS to open the Contact Information dialog.
3. Select a contact from the DataSuite contact list or enter a telephone number.
Click OK to send the test SMS.
4. The test Email will contain the following content:
Subject: Test message sent from the DataSuite software
Body: This is a test message sent from the DataSuite software. Sent on the
dd/mm/yy mm:hh
17.9.5. Analysis Menu Items
The Analysis menu items are enabled when viewing offline data in History View.
The Analysis options available are:

Calculate Dew Point

Calculate MKT

FO Pasteurization

Histogram

Export to Excel

Export to CSV
MKT (Mean Kinetic Temperature)
Mean Kinetic Temperature or MKT is used for calculating temperature stress of
perishable stock goods such as medicines or food, during storage and distribution
cycles. The MKT is calculated on a temperature graph opened from an offline
DataSuite data file, in History View.
To use the MKT feature:
1. Go to File > Open and open the data file containing the relevant temperature
measurements.
2. In History View, with the graph tab in view, go to Analysis > MKT in the main
menu. The MKT dialog is opened.
179
Figure 83: MKT dialog
3. Use the cursors to select the data set, or leave the graph as is to perform the
MKT calculation on the entire data set.
4. Enter the relevant Activation Energy, and the Low and High Limits of the data set
to be calculated (in °C), into the MKT dialog.
5. Click Calculate. A Pass or Fail indication will be displayed and in the event of a
Pass, the MKT value will also be displayed.
6. Click Print to print the MKT dialog with the results.
Export to Excel
You may export offline data to Excel by selecting this menu item or by clicking the
Export to Excel icon
in the lower graph toolbar in History View. The data is
opened in an Excel worksheet and includes pertinent information such as logger
name, SN, sensor names, alarm levels as well as the actual data readings.
Refer to section ‎17.22 for more information.
Export to CSV
You may export offline data to CSV file format by selecting this menu item. Upon
selecting this option, you will be prompted to save the file either in the default
DataSuite directory or in directory of your choosing. The data is opened in CSV file
format and includes pertinent information such as logger name, SN, sensor names,
alarm levels as well as the actual data readings.
Refer to section ‎17.22 for more information.
17.10. Devices Menu Items
17.10.1. Detect Device
When DataSuite is launched it automatically scans all ports for DataSuite supported
devices. Select this menu item to manually detect devices.
180
All devices are automatically detected by the software when connected to the
computer. If you connect a device when it is switched off, and then switch the device
on, the software won’t detect the unit. You will have to use the Detect Devices
feature.
The device may also lose power and go offline while connected to the USB, in which
case you will also need to detect it manually.
The Devices menu also supports Stop All and Run All commands for all connected
loggers.
17.10.2. Stop All
To stop all the online loggers in the Map View simultaneously, go to the Devices >
Stop All menu item. Prior to stopping the loggers, DataSuite will first download and
data not already transmitted to the computer.
This feature is password-enabled.
17.10.3. Run All
To run all the online loggers in the Map View simultaneously, go to the Devices >
Run All menu item. Prior to running the loggers, DataSuite will first clear the logger
menu. This command will not apply to any devices currently in Timer Run or Push to
Run modes.
This feature is password-enabled.
17.10.4. Auto Setup Mode
Note: This feature currently supports MicroLite II, MicroLogPRO II and PicoLite.
The Auto Setup feature is an extremely convenient, time-saving feature when
needing to setup tens or even hundreds of units for mass deployment, using the
same setup parameters (sampling rate, memory mode, etc.).
181
By taking a default setup saved for a reference unit, when in Auto Setup mode each
unit connected to the PC with being configured using this setup file.
Refer to section ‎17.17.6 for full instructions for using the Auto Setup feature.
17.11. Search Devices
If you have many device icons situated in the Map View and have trouble locating the
specific device to configure, the Search feature can be very helpful.
In the top right corner of the main window you will find the Search window:
The search criteria are:

Device Serial Number e.g. 7002354

Device Comment e.g. Lab 1/F

Device Type e.g. DNL910-PA
Enter the relevant search criteria in the text window and all relevant matching devices
will appear in the Search Results box.
The Search Results box will filter the results as the search criteria more closely
match the devices in the Map View.
Once you have located the relevant device you may configure it directly from the
Search Results box by right-clicking on the device icon to open the context menu.
182
To locate the device on the Map View itself, simply click on the device row in the
Search Results box and the icon will flash three times with a red outline:
.
17.12. Data Recovery
For DataNet Loggers
The ability to recover data when part of the system goes offline or is shutdown is a
key feature of the DataSuite system.
Note: USB-enabled DataNet data loggers support data download via USB if wireless
transfer is not possible.
When the data loggers are acquiring data they transmit to the Receiver at the
predefined rate, either directly or via one or more Repeaters.
There may be occasions when the data transmission fails and the data is not
updated in real-time in the software window. When this happens, the software has
several ways of recovering the data so the user will always be able to view all
samples recorded by the logger. The online system will never lose data i.e. the data
integrity will always been maintained.
If the end unit tries to send data to the Receiver but fails, it will continually try to send
the data until it succeeds. In such a case, the software or workstation may be
shutdown or its parent unit, the Repeater, may be offline. Or the end unit itself may
go offline due to a drained battery. Once the end unit has reconnected with the
network, for instance when the software is reopened or the Repeater is back online, it
will be able to complete the transmission of all its data and the software will be
updated with this data. The data recovery is all completed automatically and the user
is not required to perform any specific actions.
Note: In the Tools > Option menu, select the checkbox to enable automatic data
download when the software is launched. Otherwise you will have to perform manual
download from the Logger context menu.
For Standalone Loggers
For DaqLink, MicroLogPRO II and MicroLite loggers, when the units are connected to
the computer and detected by the DataSuite software, they will automatically begin
downloading data.
183
If they were already connected and streaming online data, and the DataSuite
software or computer was shutdown, the units will continue to collect data. Upon redetection by DataSuite, data will again be downloaded ensuring full data recovery to
the DataSuite database.
17.13. Saving Data
As soon as a logger starts to record data the software creates a data file to which it
writes the logger data.
In Windows XP, for example, logger data files are stored in the following default
location:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Fourtec\DataSuite\Data Files
In Windows 7, the data files are stored here:
C:\Users\Public\Fourtec\DataSuite
A folder is created for each data logger and is named according to the logger Serial
Number. In this folder is stored the data files. A file is created for each day that the
logger is recording data. The file name format is the date followed by the file
extension e.g. 2007-12-30.dat.
The data is saved automatically by the software. There is no need for the user to
save the data manually.
For applications where the data is being streamed online, directly to the software the
data file is saved as follows:

Every 15 minutes

When the software is closed

When the user opens an archived data file, the file is updated with all data not
saved to that point
You can also save the data in a text file format. Refer to section ‎17.9.1 for more
details.
17.14. Viewing Archived (Offline) Data
The user can view the logger data online or can choose to open archived data of one
or more loggers, including loggers of different models. Archived data is all data that
was logged by a specific logger and recorded by the software into the DataSuite
directory on the PC.
Follow the instructions below to open archived data.
1. Click the Open icon to launch the Open Data Files dialog.
2. Using the calendar define the date and time period for which you wish to view
your data.
3. Select the logger from the list of loggers in the dialog. The loggers can be listed in
ascending or descending order according to logger serial number or comment by
clicking the relevant header. Click OK to view the data.
Note: The DataSuite data file path is displayed at the top of the Open Data Files
dialog.
184
Figure 84: Open Data Files dialog
4. In the Sync Data dialog, you can select the sampling rate at which you wish to
display the data. The default option is the original rate. Click OK.
Figure 85: Sync Data dialog
The data is opened in History View. Refer to section ‎17.5.3 for an explanation of the
History View.
You may display data sets from more than one logger and display them all in History
View, using the Data Map to navigate through the data. Refer to section ‎17.5.4 for
more details regarding the Data Map.
185
17.15. Viewing Online Data
You can view the data from any of your loggers in real-time, as the data is being
recorded and transmitted to the PC. For DataNet units, the Receiver must be
connected and the network up and running. For all other standalone loggers, the
units must be connected via USB cable to the DataSuite software to enable online
data view.

While the logger is running double click the Logger icon in the Map View.

While the logger is running open the logger context menu and select Display
Data.
Figure 86: Online data window
The data displayed in this window is the data that was transmitted by the logger in
the current software session. Data transmitted during a previous session of the
software being open will not be displayed. For example, when you setup the logger it
creates a new online session. This data can be viewed by opening archived data.
Refer to section ‎17.14.
You may view the data in a graph or table by clicking the relevant tabs in the online
data window. While in either of these views, the data is constantly being updated in
real-time in the respective view according to the transmission rate of the logger.
Note: Users of Windows 7 using right to left language settings e.g. Hebrew, may
have problems viewing the Date/Time in the DataSuite graph. This is a known
Microsoft ® bug. Until a bug fix is released, change the Regional Settings to English.
17.15.1. Showing/Hiding the Data Sets
In the online graph display, where you have data from only one logger displayed, you
can show or hide the individual sensor data by using the sensor labels at the bottom
of the graph.
186
In the screenshot above you can see two labels, Internal Digital Temperature and Int
RH. At present, each label is active meaning the sensor data corresponding to the
label is shown on the graph.
By clicking any of the sensor labels, you can hide the data from the graph. The label
will then be grayed out. See the screenshot below:
Note: You can hide all of the sensor labels (not plots) from the graph by clicking the
Plot Legend icon
.
17.16. Working in Map View
The Map View is the main view from which you monitor your connected devices. It is
in this view that you can see all the icons representing the units in your system.
Refer to section ‎17.5.1 for a quick overview of the Map View and section ‎17.5.5 for a
list of all the Map View icons.
17.16.1. Loading Map View Wallpaper
You can load an image file representing a map of your facility in which the network is
operating. You can then move the unit icons into their actual positions on the map.

Double-click on the Map View background to go straight into the Open dialog and
locate the image file.

Right-click on the Map View background to open the context menu and select the
option to either Load or Reset the wallpaper.
Note: When deploying the system for the first time it is highly recommended to use a
map of the facility to make the deployment work efficiently.
187
17.16.2. Printing the Map View
To print the Map View go to File > Print Map View. This will also print the icon name
tags and network paths, if enabled.
The Map View maintains its aspect ratio when printed.
17.16.3. Displaying Icon Name Tags
You can display a name tag for each device on the Map View. The name tag consists
of the unit Comment, as defined in the unit Setup:
To toggle this feature, right-click on the Map View background and select Display All
Units' Name.
When this feature is enabled, clicking the unit icon will also highlight the name tag in
red.
17.16.4. Moving Icons around the Screen
Go to Tools > Lock Map View and ensure this menu item is not selected in order to
freely move the unit icons around the screen. When you have finished placing the
icons into position you may then lock the Map View so as not to mistakenly place an
icon out of position.
17.16.5. DataNet Multiple Network Connections
DataSuite supports connection of more than one DataNet Receiver simultaneously.
This means that you are able to manage multiple DataNet networks from one
DataSuite interface.
With a Map View featuring many device icons, to identify which network each device
belongs to, each device tooltip includes the network name and unique ID. In
addition, when scrolling over the Receiver icon with the mouse, all devices
associated to that Receiver’s network is highlighted by a green frame.
17.16.6. DataNet Logger Icon Context Menu – Wireless
Connection Options
Right clicking the DataNet Logger icon when connected wirelessly to the network will
give the following options:
188
Display Data
Displays the logger’s data in Graph view. The graph displays the data in real-time.
There is also the option to display the data in Table view or to view the data statistics.
Download Data
Downloads all data in the logger memory to the DataSuite software. When logger is
downloading the data, the Logger icon in Map View will appear as follows:
Note: Data download is also available via USB connection. Refer to section ‎17.16.7.
Cancel Download
When logger is downloading data you may cancel the download per logger by
selecting this menu item.
As cancelling the data download results in data not being downloaded to the
computer, there is a chance that data may be lost if the download isn’t completed at
a later stage and the logger’s cyclic memory has meanwhile erased these readings.
Note: Cancel Download feature works only if there are no other commands in the
queue following the Download process. For example, if the data is downloading and
you sent the command Call Unit to the logger, and then selected Cancel Download,
the download will not be cancelled.
Reset Alarm
When the logger is in a state of alarm, this option will reset the alarm state to normal
on both the logger and the software. The visual and audible alarms will return to
normal. If after reset the logger is still in alarm conditions, then the visible and audible
alarms will return.
Call Unit (Beep)
This feature sends a command to the logger to emit intermittent audible beeps for up
to one minute. This is useful when trying to physically locate a logger in your facility.
Press the Menu button on the logger to stop the audible alarm.
Calibration
Refer to section ‎17.19.4 on page 224 for an overview of the Calibration feature.
Note: A logger can’t be calibrated while it is in Run mode. The option will be grayed
out. You must Stop the logger first.
Update Firmware
Refer to section ‎18.2 on page 250 for an overview of the Update Firmware feature.
Leave Network
Selecting this feature will kick the logger off the network. The logger will reset and will
start scanning for a new network to join.
You will be prompted to enter a password when selecting this feature.
189
Note: The default password is 1234.
Setup
Refer to section ‎17.17 on page 196 for an overview of how to setup the logger.
Multi-Setup
By using multi-setup you can select more than one logger on the Map View and send
the same configuration to all of the loggers. When this option is selected, a dialog will
open listing all of the loggers in the multi-setup selection.
Stop
Sends a command to the logger to stop logging data.
Multi-Stop
Sends a command to multiple loggers to stop logging data.
Run
Sends a command to the logger to start logging data. This command will also clear
the existing logger memory.
Multi-Run
Sends a command to multiple loggers to start logging data. This command will also
clear the existing logger memory.
Show Network Path
Displays the path of the logger RF data transmission to the Receiver. The
Transmission Strength legend appears in the bottom right of the screen when this
feature is enabled. Refer to section ‎17.7.1 for more details.
Enable/Disable Short Range Repeater
Changes the unit between Logger mode and Short Range Repeater (SRR) mode,
whereby the logger operates as both a logger and Repeater.
Note: In SRR mode the logger must be connected to AC power at all times as the
power consumption is much greater.
The logger tooltip and logger LCD menu will both indicate that the unit is in SRR
mode.
Remove
This option removes from the Map View any icons of loggers that are not on the
network anymore and so are irrelevant.
190
Turn Off
This option will turn the unit off and is password enabled. As a precaution to avoid
any data loss all data not yet transmitted will first be downloaded to the computer
prior to turning the unit off.
17.16.7. DataNet Logger Icon Context Menu – USB
Connection Options
When connected to the computer via mini-USB cable, the DNL910, DNL920 and PA
models supports the following features:

Data Download – Downloads logger memory directly to the DataSuite data files
folder. To view the data refer to section ‎17.14.

Firmware Update – Refer to section ‎18.2.4 for more details.

Turn Off – Turns off the unit.
To detect the logger using USB:
1. Make sure the data logger is joined to an existing network. When connected to
the computer via USB go to Devices > Detect Device in the DataSuite main
menu.
2. Right-click on the logger USB icon
of the relevant options.
to open the context menu and select one
17.16.8. Viewing DataNet Logger Status
When you scroll the mouse cursor over the Logger icon a tooltip will pop up
displaying data relevant to the Logger status at the time.
Logger Tooltip
The tooltip will always display the following data, even if offline:

Network Name

Network ID

Logger Type

Serial Number

Logger Name/Comment
When the logger is online and running the following tooltip is displayed:
DataNet Logger Tooltip
191
In online mode, the logger also displays:

Device mode – Logger or Short Range Repeater

The power status (% Battery left or Connected to AC)

Reception quality: Strength of RF signal between logger and Receiver

Version number: Firmware version of the logger

Last sample time: If logger is running, time stamp of last recorded sample.

Real-time Sensor values: All sensor values are displayed, including sensor name
and alarm status.
DataNet Command Queue Progress
The tooltip is updated with specific commands being performed by the DataNet
logger. For example, if the logger is downloading data to the software you can see
the progress in the tooltip. In addition, the Logger icon has a blue progress indicator
so you can monitor the progress without using the tooltip.
Common commands include Download, Setup, Stop, Run, Beep and more.
17.16.9. DataNet Receiver Icon Context Menu
Right clicking the Receiver icon will give the following options:

Setup

Update Firmware

Lock Network

Form New Network

Refresh Network Connections

Show Network Paths

Mini DataNet Device Filter
192

Change to Repeater
Setup
Receiver Setup lets the user change the name of the network name assigned to that
specific Receiver. The network name appears in the tooltip of every device
connected to that network. Click Setup to implement the change or Close to close
the dialog without making any changes.
Update Firmware
Selecting this option will launch the Receiver firmware update process. Refer to
section ‎18.2 for more details.
Lock Network
By locking the network you do not allow any additional units to join the network.
During the network scan, the logger will not even detect the network if it is locked.
By unlocking the network you leave it open for any unit to join the network, even if
you do not wish them to.
Form New Network
Select this option to form a new network on the Receiver. The Receiver will then form
a new network based on your RF environment. This will ensure optimal network
performance.
Refer to section ‎3.8 for more details on optimizing the performance.
Once a new network is formed, any loggers connected to the old network will need to
rescan and join the new network. This must be done manually by going to each
logger and resetting it via the LCD menu options.
Refresh Network Connections
Use this feature to send a command to the Receiver to re-establish connection to the
end units in its specific network. This is useful when wanting to ensure the network
connectivity is performing optimally without any delay or lag due to changes in
environmental conditions or location of the end units. Such delays can explain logger
icons not displaying the correct information or commands not being sent promptly to
the end units.
Note: The software automatically refreshes the network connections every 10
minutes.
193
Show Network Paths
While in Map View, enable this option to display the path that the RF signal of all
units in the network takes to reach the Receiver. If Repeaters are used in the network
it will show the signal routed via the Repeater, en route to the Receiver.
The paths are color-coded so you can also see the transmission strength. A legend
appears at the bottom of the window.

Red = Low (0 to 23% strength)

Yellow = Medium (23 to 56%)

Green = High (56 to 100%)
Mini DataNet Device Filter
When working with Mini DataNet units, you have the option to enable a filter which
determines which device can be allowed onto the DataNet network, according to the
device Serial Number. Recommended when managing multiple networks in the same
environment.
Refer to section ‎3.5.3 for more details.
Change to Repeater
Use this feature to convert the unit from Receiver to Repeater mode. Do not perform
this operation on a Receiver with a dedicated network as the network and all related
devices will then go offline.
17.16.10. Viewing DataNet Receiver Status
When you scroll the mouse cursor over the Receiver icon a tooltip will pop up
displaying data relevant to the Receiver status at the time.
Receiver Tooltip
The tooltip will always display the following data, even if offline:

Unit type (Receiver)
When the Receiver is online the following tooltip is displayed:
194
In online mode, the Receiver also displays:

Serial Number

Network: The Network ID of the currently formed network

Version: Firmware version of Receiver
17.16.11. DataNet Repeater Icon Context Menu – Wireless
Connection Options
Right clicking the Repeater icon will give the following options:
Setup
Repeater Setup lets the user change the name of the unit. Once the name has been
changed, click Setup (or Close to close the dialog without making any changes).
Multi-Setup
By using multi-setup you can select more than one Repeater on the Map View and
send the same configuration to all of the Repeaters.
Call Unit (Beep)
This feature sends a command to the Repeater to emit intermittent audible beeps for
up to one minute. This is useful when trying to physically locate a logger in your
facility.
Press the Menu button on the Repeater to stop the audible alarm.
Leave Network
Selecting this feature will kick the Repeater off the network.
You will be prompted to enter a password when selecting this feature.
Note: The default password is 1234.
Update Firmware
Selecting this option will launch the Repeater firmware update process. Refer to
section ‎18.2 for more details.
Show Network Path
Displays the path of the Repeater RF data transmission to the Receiver. The
Transmission Strength legend appears in the bottom right of the screen when this
feature is enabled. Refer to section ‎17.7.1 for more details.
195
Remove
This option removes from the Map View any Repeater icons that are not on the
network anymore and so are irrelevant.
17.16.12. DataNet Repeater Icon Context Menu – USB
Connection Options
Update Firmware
Selecting this option will launch the Repeater firmware update process. Refer to
section ‎18.2 for more details.
Turn Off
This option will turn the unit off and is password enabled.
Change to Receiver
This option will change the Repeater to Receiver mode, and form a network. If the
Repeater has end units connected to it, performing this option could result in units
losing their connection to the network.
Change to Substitute Receiver
In the event that a Receiver is no longer working, any existing Repeater on the
Receiver’s network can be transformed into a Substitute Receiver, to enable the
network to continue working in online mode.
17.16.13. Viewing DataNet Repeater Status
When you scroll the mouse cursor over the Repeater icon a tooltip will pop up
displaying data relevant to the Repeater status at the time.
Repeater Tooltip
The tooltip will always display the following data, even if offline:

Unit type (Router)

Serial Number

Repeater Name/Comment
When the Repeater is online the following tooltip is displayed:
In online mode, the Repeater also displays:

The power status (% battery left or Connected to AC)
196

Reception quality: Strength of RF signal between logger and Receiver

Version: Firmware version of Repeater
17.16.14. DaqLink Logger Icon Connection Options
Right-clicking the DaqLink logger icon will give the following options:
Display Data
Displays the logger’s data in Graph view. The graph displays the data in real-time.
There is also the option to display the data in Table view or to view the data statistics.
Download Data
Downloads all data in the logger memory to the DataSuite software. When logger is
downloading the data, the Logger icon in Map View will appear as follows:
Cancel Download
When logger is downloading data you may cancel the download per logger by
selecting this menu item.
Note: This feature works only if there are no other commands in the queue following
the Download process.
Reset Alarm
When the logger is in a state of alarm, this option will reset the alarm state to normal
on both the logger and the software. The visual and audible alarms will return to
normal. If after reset the logger is still in alarm conditions, then the visible and audible
alarms will return.
Calibration
Refer to section ‎17.20 ‎17.19.4on page 224 for an overview of the Calibration feature.
Note: A logger can’t be calibrated while it is in Run mode. The option will be grayed
out. You must Stop the logger first.
Cancel Firmware Update
When a firmware update is in progress, select this option to cancel the update and
continue using the previous firmware version.
Setup
Refer to section ‎17.17 on page 196 for an overview of how to setup the logger.
Stop
Sends a command to the logger to stop logging data.
Run
Sends a command to the logger to start logging data. This command will also clear
the existing logger memory.
197
Remove
This option removes from the Map View icons of loggers that are no longer in use.
Turn Off
This option will turn the unit off and is password enabled. As a precaution to avoid
any data loss all data not yet transmitted will first be downloaded to the computer
prior to turning the unit off.
17.16.15. MicroLite Logger Icon Connection Options
When connected to the computer via USB, the MicroLite models support the
following features:
Display Data
Displays the logger’s data in Graph view. The graph displays the data in real-time.
There is also the option to display the data in Table view or to view the data statistics.
Note: MicroLite II models with external input caps (4-20 mA, 0-10 V and NTC
Temperature) do not support online, real-time data view.
Download Data
Downloads all data in the logger memory to the DataSuite software. When logger is
downloading the data, the Logger icon in Map View will appear as follows:
Cancel Download
When logger is downloading data you may cancel the download per logger by
selecting this menu item.
As cancelling the data download results in data not being downloaded to the
computer, there is a chance that data may be lost if the download isn’t completed at
a later stage and the logger’s cyclic memory has meanwhile erased these readings.
Calibration
Refer to section ‎17.19.4 on page 224 for an overview of the Calibration feature.
Note: A logger can’t be calibrated while it is in Run mode. The option will be grayed
out. You must Stop the logger first.
Update Firmware
Selecting this feature will commence update of the logger firmware, as long as the
firmware file is situated in the main DataSuite directory.
Note: If the logger is currently in Push to Run or Timer Run mode, Update Firmware
option will be disabled.
Setup
Refer to section ‎17.17 on page 196 for an overview of how to setup the logger.
198
Multi-Setup
By using multi-setup you can select more than one logger on the Map View and send
the same configuration to all of the loggers. When this option is selected, a dialog will
open listing all of the loggers in the multi-setup selection.
Setup File
Use the Save Setup option to save a file containing the logger's current setup to any
location on your computer.
Using the Load Setup option from the Logger icon menu of another MicroLite, you
can then load the setup file to other units and run them without even opening the
Setup dialog.
For mass deployment of MicroLite units using the same setup file, you must first save
the default setup file and then enable the Auto Setup mode from the Devices menu.
Auto Setup mode allows fast setup of all supported devices.
For more details on using this feature refer to section ‎17.17.6.
Stop
Sends a command to the logger to stop logging data.
Run
Sends a command to the logger to start logging data. This command will also clear
the existing logger memory.
Remove
This option removes from the Map View icons of loggers that are no longer in use.
17.16.16. Viewing MicroLite Logger Status
MicroLite Logger Tooltip
In online mode, the logger displays:

Device model and memory size

Serial Number

Device Name

Battery status (in %)

Logger firmware version number

Last sample time: If logger is running, time stamp of last recorded sample.

Real-time Sensor values: All sensor values are displayed, including sensor name
and alarm status.
199
17.16.17. MicroLogPRO II Logger Icon Connection Options
When connected to the computer via mini-USB cable, the MicroLogPRO II models
support the following features:
Display Data
Displays the logger’s data in Graph view. The graph displays the data in real-time.
There is also the option to display the data in Table view or to view the data statistics.
Download Data
Downloads all data in the logger memory to the DataSuite software. When logger is
downloading the data, the Logger icon in Map View will appear as follows:
Cancel Download
When logger is downloading data you may cancel the download per logger by
selecting this menu item.
As cancelling the data download results in data not being downloaded to the
computer, there is a chance that data may be lost if the download isn’t completed at
a later stage and the logger’s cyclic memory has meanwhile erased these readings.
Calibration
Refer to section ‎17.19.4 on page 224 for an overview of the Calibration feature.
Note: A logger can’t be calibrated while it is in Run mode. The option will be grayed
out. You must Stop the logger first.
Update Firmware
Selecting this feature will commence update of the logger firmware, as long as the
firmware file is situated in the main DataSuite directory.
Note: If the logger is currently in Push to Run or Timer Run mode, Update Firmware
option will be disabled.
Setup
Refer to section ‎17.17 on page 196 for an overview of how to setup the logger.
Multi-Setup
By using multi-setup you can select more than one logger on the Map View and send
the same configuration to all of the loggers. When this option is selected, a dialog will
open listing all of the loggers in the multi-setup selection.
Setup File
Use the Save Setup option to save a file containing the logger's current setup to any
location on your computer.
200
Using the Load Setup option from the Logger icon menu of another MicroLite, you
can then load the setup file to other units and run them without even opening the
Setup dialog.
For mass deployment of MicroLite units using the same setup file, you must first save
the default setup file and then enable the Auto Setup mode from the Devices menu.
Auto Setup mode allows fast setup of all supported devices.
For more details on using this feature refer to section ‎17.17.6.
Stop
Sends a command to the logger to stop logging data.
Run
Sends a command to the logger to start logging data. This command will also clear
the existing logger memory.
Remove
This option removes from the Map View icons of loggers that are no longer in use.
17.16.18. Viewing MicroLogPRO II Logger Status
MicroLogPRO II Logger Tooltip
In online mode, the logger displays:

Device model – EC800 or EC850

Serial Number

Device Name

Battery status (in %)

Version number: Firmware version of the logger

Last sample time: If logger is running, time stamp of last recorded sample.

Real-time Sensor values: All sensor values are displayed, including sensor name
and alarm status.
17.16.19. PicoLite Logger Icon Connection Options
When connected to the computer via USB, the PicoLite supports the following
features:
Display Data
Displays the logger’s data in Graph view. The graph displays the data in real-time.
There is also the option to display the data in Table view or to view the data statistics.
201
Download Data
Downloads all data in the logger memory to the DataSuite software. When logger is
downloading the data, the Logger icon in Map View will appear as follows:
Cancel Download
When logger is downloading data you may cancel the download per logger by
selecting this menu item.
As cancelling the data download results in data not being downloaded to the
computer, there is a chance that data may be lost if the download isn’t completed at
a later stage and the logger’s cyclic memory has meanwhile erased these readings.
Calibration
Refer to section ‎17.19.4 on page 224 for an overview of the Calibration feature.
Note: A logger can’t be calibrated while it is in Run mode. The option will be grayed
out. You must Stop the logger first.
Update Firmware
Selecting this feature will commence update of the logger firmware, as long as the
firmware file is situated in the main DataSuite directory.
Note: If the logger is currently in Push to Run or Timer Run mode, Update Firmware
option will be disabled.
Setup
Refer to section ‎17.17 on page 196 for an overview of how to setup the logger.
Setup File
Use the Save Setup option to save a file containing the logger's current setup to any
location on your computer.
Using the Load Setup option from the Logger icon menu of another MicroLite, you
can then load the setup file to other units and run them without even opening the
Setup dialog.
For mass deployment of MicroLite units using the same setup file, you must first save
the default setup file and then enable the Auto Setup mode from the Devices menu.
Auto Setup mode allows fast setup of all supported devices.
For more details on using this feature refer to section ‎17.17.6.
Stop
Sends a command to the logger to stop logging data.
Run
Sends a command to the logger to start logging data. This command will also clear
the existing logger memory.
202
Remove
This option removes from the Map View icons of loggers that are no longer in use.
Mark Time Stamp
Selecting this option while the PicoLite is running will mark a new sample to the
logger menu, with a time stamp. Refer to section ‎17.21.2 for more details on viewing
time stamps in DataSuite.
17.16.20. Viewing PicoLite Logger Status
PicoLite Logger Tooltip
In online mode, the logger displays:

Device model and memory size

Serial Number

Device Name

Battery status (in %)

Logger firmware version number

Last sample time: If logger is running, time stamp of last recorded sample

Real-time Temp sensor value, including alarm status
17.17. Configuring the Logger
DataSuite software allows you to configure each logger, via direct USB connection or
wirelessly in the case of DataNet.
To configure the logger once it’s detected by the DataSuite software, right-click the
Logger icon in the Map View and select Setup.
The setup dialogs for each of the supported products differ, as each model has
different parameters. Each Setup window is described below.
17.17.1. DataNet Device Setup Tab
The DataNet Setup window has two tabs, Device Setup and Alarm Setup.
The main logger configuration is performed on the Device Setup tab. Any alarm
levels you wish to configure is performed on the Alarm Setup tab.
203
Figure 87: DataNet Device Setup tab
Comment
This is the name of the logger. It is advisable to name the logger according to the
location in the facility.
Note: The Comment field in the software and on the logger display supports all
standard alphanumeric characters except for the following: ', ", ~, &, \
Sampling Rate
Sampling rate is one sample per second to one sample per 18 hours. However, there
are programming limitations you must be aware of when configuring the loggers. The
sampling rate will vary depending on the number and type of sensors you setup.
Refer to section ‎4.7.5 on page 49.
Transmission Interval
You can define how often the logger will actually transmit to the network. You may
wish to have the logger transmit with every sample, if you have slower sampling
rates, or less frequently, if you have a fast sampling rate.
The transmission interval must be a multiple of the sampling rate, so for example if
the sampling rate is 3 seconds, then the minimum transmission rate must be every 3
seconds, and then every 6 seconds, 9 seconds, and so on.
204
This parameter was designed to ease the burden on the network if you have many
loggers as each logger can transmit at different rates.
Averaging Points
You can choose have online averaging of up to 10 points around the real value in
order to smooth the data readings, if they are exhibiting interference. The
recommended averaging is 4 samples.
Temperature Units
Toggle between °C and °F. This applies to the readings displayed on the logger LCD
as well as in the software.
Active Sensors
Depending on the logger model, you can activate up to two internal sensors and four
external sensors. Simply select the inputs you want to use and then select the sensor
types from the adjacent drop-down menu. You don’t have to select the external
sensor input in any order. You may select only Input 4 if you desire.
Note: On the DNL920 you cannot run the humidity sensor without running the
temperature sensor in parallel.
This is because when using the DNL920 data logger and selecting the internal
humidity sensor in the Device Setup dialog, the internal digital temperature sensor
will automatically be selected as well. This sensor provides the temperature
compensation necessary for the humidity sensor to reach the 3% accuracy as stated
in the sensor specifications. It is not used for recording temperature. The internal
digital sensor is used to record temperature on the DNL920.
Custom Sensor Names
You can also give the sensor a custom name, which will appear in the software when
viewing the data. This is convenient when using several of the same type of sensors
and you wish to differentiate between them in terms of their environment or material it
is measuring.
Recording Time
This field displays the length of time the logger memory will be able to record for
depending upon the number of sensors used and sampling rate.
Setup and Run
Clicking Setup and Run will send the setup to the logger and immediately start
logging data.
Setup Only
Clicking Setup Only will send the setup to the logger but it will not actually start
logging data. You will need to select Run from the Logger context menu or go back
into the Setup dialog.
205
Close
Clicking Close will close the Setup dialog without saving any of your configurations.
Note: Running the logger clears the logger memory. All previously recorded data will
be erased when you begin a new logging session.
17.17.2. DaqLink Device Setup Tab
The DaqLink Setup window has two tabs, Device Setup and Alarm Setup.
The main logger configuration is performed on the Device Setup tab. Any alarm
levels you wish to configure is performed on the Alarm Setup tab.
Figure 88: DaqLink Device Setup tab
Comment
This is the name of the logger. It is advisable to name the logger according to the
location in the facility.
Note: The Comment field in the software and on the logger display supports all
standard alphanumeric characters except for the following: ', ", ~, &, \
206
Sampling Rate
Sampling rate is one sample per second to one sample per 18 hours. However, there
are programming limitations you must be aware of when configuring the loggers. The
sampling rate will vary depending on the number and type of sensors you setup.
Refer to section ‎7.3.5 on page 89.
Memory State
From the drop-down menu you have the following options:

Online Mode: For working with logger connected to PC. Data will be transmitted
in real-time i.e. at the same time as the sampling rate.

Optimized Memory Mode: For working with the logger as a standalone device,
not connected to the PC. In this mode, the memory is more efficiently managed
as the data does not need to be transmitted together with the sampling rate. Use
the Transmissions interval parameter in the Setup window to see the rate at
which the data will be displayed on the logger or in the software.
Note: If used when connected to the PC, the data will not be transmitted in real-time.
Cyclic Mode
If this checkbox is not selected, the logger will stop recording data when the memory
capacity is filled.
Enabling Cyclic mode will result in the oldest samples in the memory being
overwritten by new samples once the memory is full. This allows continuous data
logging.
Averaging Points
You can choose have online averaging of up to 10 points around the real value in
order to smooth the data readings, if they are a little noisy. The recommended
averaging is 4 samples.
Note: If configuring Alarm duration with averaging points selected, the alarm will be
counted from the time of the last sampling point used to calculate the average.
Temperature Units
Toggle between °C and °F. This applies to the readings displayed on the logger LCD
as well as in the software.
Anti-tamper Mode
To prevent tampering with the DaqLink logger, selecting this option will disable the
following features on the logger menu:

Pause

Reset

Stop and turn off unit
When running DataSuite with the CFR module activated, the Anti-tamper checkbox
will be disabled by default. While working in a CFR environment the user will not
have permissions to pause, reset, stop or turn off the DaqLink unit via the LCD menu.
207
Active Sensors
Depending on the logger model, you can activate up to two internal sensors and four
external sensors. Simply select the inputs you want to use and then select the sensor
types from the adjacent drop-down menu. You don’t have to select the external
sensor input in any order. You may select only Input 4 if you desire.
Note: On the DBSA720 you cannot run the humidity sensor without running the
temperature sensor in parallel.
This is because when using the DBSA720 data logger and selecting the internal
humidity sensor in the Device Setup dialog, the internal digital temperature sensor
will automatically be selected as well. This sensor provides the temperature
compensation necessary for the humidity sensor to reach the 3% accuracy as stated
in the sensor specifications. It is not used for recording temperature. The internal
digital sensor is used to record temperature on the DBSA720.
Custom Sensor Names
You can also give the sensor a custom name, which will appear in the software when
viewing the data. This is convenient when using several of the same type of sensors
and you wish to differentiate between them in terms of their environment or material it
is measuring.
Recording Time
This field displays the length of time the logger memory will be able to record for
depending upon the number of sensors used and sampling rate.
Setup and Run
Clicking Setup and Run will send the setup to the logger and immediately start
logging data.
Setup Only
Clicking Setup Only will send the setup to the logger but it will not actually start
logging data. You will need to select Run from the Logger context menu or go back
into the Setup dialog.
Close
Clicking Close will close the Setup dialog without saving any of your configurations.
Note: Running the logger clears the logger memory. All previously recorded data will
be erased when you begin a new logging session
17.17.3. DataNet and DaqLink Alarm Setup Tab
A major feature of the DataNet and DaqLink systems is the ability to configure alarm
levels into the loggers so any breach of these levels as recorded on the data logger
is monitored by the software, and the user is notified via Email/SMS/audible and
visual indicators.
208
The Alarm Setup tab lets you configure each sensor for the following alarms:

Low

Pre-Low

Pre-High

High

Contact Open / Contact Close (when the Contact sensor is selected)
Using the Pre Alarms gives the user ample warning of a possible breach of real
alarm levels, so necessary measures can be taken to prevent such a breach.
Simply select the check box for the type of alarm you wish to be notified. You can
select all alarms too. Enter the alarm value in the text box.
Figure 89: DataNet and DaqLink Alarm Setup tab
Alarm Delay and Pre-alarm Delay
The time until the alarm (or pre-alarm) is activated. You may not want to have the
alarm sound immediately after the alarm level is breached as you are only interested
in a condition where the alarm level lasted a certain amount of time.
For example, if monitoring change of temperature in a freezer, you would only be
interested in a High alarm which lasted more than one minute as anything else could
just be caused by the freezer door opening for a few seconds, as opposed to a power
failure leading to rise in temperature.
209
Alarm Duration
The duration of the alarm that is set off by one or more sensors breaching the alarm
level.
Sound Alarm during Pre-alarm
You also have the option to sound the alarm in the software during a pre-alarm
scenario, not just for a standard alarm.
Once you have configured your alarms, you may return to the Device Setup tab or
click one of the Setup buttons at the bottom of the tab.
17.17.4. MicroLite & MicroLogPRO II Setup Window
The MicroLite and MicroLogPRO II Setup window include the following tabs:
Properties, Sensors, Display (for MicroLite), Power Saving Settings (for
MicroLogPRO II) and Boomerang Report. They contain many of the same
parameters for both products, although some parameters are product-specific.
Refer to section ‎17.25 on page 244 for more details regarding the Boomerang
feature.
The main logger configuration is performed on the Properties tab. The Sensor and
Alarm setup is performed on the Sensors tab, and LCD / LED options are available
on the Display or Power Saving Settings tab depending on the product.
Figure 90: MicroLogPRO II Properties tab
210
Properties Tab
Comment
This is the name of the logger and supports up to 15 characters. It is advisable to
name the logger according to the location in the facility.
Note: The Comment field in the software supports all standard alphanumeric
characters except for the following: ', ", ~, &, \
Temperature Scale
Toggle between °C and °F. This applies to the readings displayed on the logger LCD
as well as in the software.
Options
 Cyclic Run – Select to enable the logger memory to continue running in cyclic
mode, whereby the logger will not stop once the memory capacity is reached but
will erase the first samples in memory. If this option is left unchecked, the logger
will stop when the memory is full.
 Push to Run – Select to enable logger activation via the device keypad by
pressing both buttons together to start running (MicroLogPRO II) or via the
magnet key (MicroLite II).
 Timer Run – Select the time at which the logger should start running. Until that
time the logger will remain in standby mode.
 Stop on key press – Select to enable the user to stop the logger running via the
keypad (MicroLogPRO II) or magnet key (MicroLite II) and not just via the
software.
 Stop on cap removal – For MicroLite II External input models only. Select to
enable the logger to stop recording data when the external cap is disconnected
from the main body of the logger. This prevents garbage data being recorded
when the external sensor is disconnected. The logger will stop when the next
sample is due to be recorded.
 Deep sleep mode – For MicroLogPRO II only. Select to run the logger in deep
sleep mode. While in Stop mode, the logger will shut down after two minutes of
inactivity and enter deep sleep in order to conserve battery. To wake up from
deep sleep, the Min/Max hour button must be pressed.
If deep sleep mode is not selected the logger will always stay on, and consume
more battery. However, it can be connected to USB and not require pressing the
keypad to wake up.
 Show Min/Max samples on LCD – For MicroLite II only. Configure the logger to
display Min/Max readings from the current sampling session on the LCD
immediately after the data samples are displayed. You can also choose to show
Min/max readings from data recorded in the last 24 hours as opposed to the full
data set.
Sampling Rate
Sampling rate is one sample per second to one sample per 18 hours.
211
Averaging Points
You can choose have online averaging of up to 10 points around the real value in
order to smooth the data readings, if they are a little noisy. The recommended
averaging is 4 samples.
Recording Time
This field displays the length of time the logger memory will be able to record for
depending upon the number of sensors used and sampling rate.
Setup and Run
Clicking Setup and Run will send the setup to the logger and immediately start
logging data.
Setup Only
Clicking Setup Only will send the setup to the logger but it will not actually start
logging data. You will need to select Run from the Logger context menu or go back
into the Setup dialog.
Close
Clicking Close will close the Setup dialog without saving any of your configurations.
Note: Running the logger clears the logger memory. All previously recorded data will
be erased when you begin a new logging session.
Sensors Tab
Use this tab to configure the specific logger inputs which should be run, in addition to
relevant alarm levels. A major feature of the DataSuite system is the ability to
configure alarm levels into the loggers so any breach of these levels is recorded on
the data logger and monitored by the software, if the unit is connected via USB. The
user may be notified of these alarms via Email/SMS/audible and visual indicators.
212
Alarm Delay
The time until the alarm is activated. You may not want to have the alarm sound
immediately after the alarm level is breached as you are only interested in a condition
where the alarm level lasted a certain amount of time.
For example, if monitoring change of temperature in a freezer, you would only be
interested in a High alarm which lasted more than one minute as anything else could
just be caused by the freezer door opening for a few seconds, as opposed to a power
failure leading to rise in temperature.
Sensor Configuration
Select the relevant checkbox to configure the logger internal and/or external sensors
to be used for measurement.
To enable Dew Point measurement on the EC850 or MicroLite II RH model, you must
select both the internal Temperature and Humidity checkboxes.
After selecting one or more of the sensor checkboxes, the Alarm checkbox is
enabled. Enter the minimum and maximum alarm levels dependent on your specific
thresholds.
Display Tab – MicroLogPRO II only
LCD Configuration
The Display tab allows the user to select one of four LCD options:
 Always On – The LCD will always remain on during logging
 On for 30, 60 or 120 seconds on key press and alarm – Selecting one of these
options will result in the LCD coming on for the defined period, after the logger
keypad is pressed or after an alarm is reached. After the defined number of
seconds, the logger LCD will shut off again. Even if the LCD is off, the logger is
continually recording data.
213
Power Saving Settings Tab – MicroLite only
The Power Saving Settings tab allows the user to configure the MicroLite's LCD
and LED modes. Reducing the usage of the LCD and LED will help extend the
battery life of the logger.
LCD Configuration
 Always On – The LCD will always remain on during logging
 On for 30, 60 or 120 seconds on key press and alarm – Selecting one of these
options will result in the LCD coming on for the defined period, after the logger
keypad is pressed or after an alarm is reached. After the defined number of
seconds, the logger LCD will shut off again. Even if the LCD is off, the logger is
continually recording data.
LED Configuration
Selecting this option will disabling the LED during alarm state, so there is no LED
indication. LED alarm indication is generally enabled when the LCD is not configured
to be always on, so the user will always be able to see that the logger is or was in
alarm state. Disabling this feature will also help to prolong battery life.
17.17.5. PicoLite Properties, Sensor and Display Setup
The PicoLite Setup window includes the following tabs: Properties, Sensors, and
Boomerang Report. They contain the same parameters for both products.
Refer to section ‎17.25 on page 244 for more details regarding the Boomerang
feature.
The main logger configuration is performed on the Properties tab. The Sensor and
Alarm setup is performed on the Sensors tab.
214
Figure 91: PicoLite Properties tab
Properties Tab
Comment
This is the name of the logger and supports up to 15 characters. It is advisable to
name the logger according to the location in the facility.
Note: The Comment field in the software supports all standard alphanumeric
characters except for the following: ', ", ~, &, \
Temperature Scale
Toggle between °C and °F. This applies to the readings displayed on the logger LCD
as well as in the software.
Options
 Cyclic Run – Select to enable the logger memory to continue running in cyclic
mode, whereby the logger will not stop once the memory capacity is reached but
will erase the first samples in memory. If this option is left unchecked, the logger
will stop when the memory is full.
 Push to Run – Select to enable logger activation via the device button by
pressing the button for at least three seconds.
 Timer Run – Select the time at which the logger should start running. Until that
time the logger will remain in standby mode.
215
Sampling Rate
Sampling rate is one sample per minute to one sample per 18 hours.
Recording Time
This field displays the length of time the logger memory will be able to record for
depending upon the sampling rate.
Setup and Run
Clicking Setup and Run will send the setup to the logger and immediately start
logging data.
Setup Only
Clicking Setup Only will send the setup to the logger but it will not actually start
logging data. You will need to select Run from the Logger context menu or go back
into the Setup dialog.
Close
Clicking Close will close the Setup dialog without saving any of your configurations.
Note: Running the logger clears the logger memory. All previously recorded data will
be erased when you begin a new logging session.
216
Sensors Tab
As the PicoLite only has one input, this tab is used to configure the temperature
sensor alarm levels. A major feature of the DataSuite system is the ability to
configure alarm levels into the loggers so any breach of these levels is recorded on
the data logger and monitored by the software, if the unit is connected via USB. The
user may be notified of these alarms via Email/SMS/audible and visual indicators.
Alarm Delay
The time until the alarm is activated. You may not want to have the alarm sound
immediately after the alarm level is breached as you are only interested in a condition
where the alarm level lasted a certain amount of time.
For example, if monitoring change of temperature in a freezer, you would only be
interested in a High alarm which lasted more than one minute as anything else could
just be caused by the freezer door opening for a few seconds, as opposed to a power
failure leading to rise in temperature.
Sensor Configuration
To set the temperature sensor alarm levels, first enable the Alarm checkbox. Then
enter the relevant minimum and maximum alarm levels depending on your specific
application thresholds.
217
17.17.6. Using the Auto Setup Mode
Note: Auto Setup Mode support MicroLite II, MicroLogPRO II and PicoLite only.
The quickest way to configure a large number of loggers is by using the Auto Setup
feature. Rather than manually entering the Setup dialog and defining the setup
parameters for each logger when connected to the computer, with Auto Setup mode
enabled each unit will be configured and run automatically. There is no need for
manual intervention other than to connect the logger.
You connect each logger, watch the setup being performed instantaneously, and
then connect the next logger, and so on, until all are completed and without the need
to open more windows or confirm any commands.
To perform Auto Setup follow the steps as outlined below:
1. First, you must connect a unit which will be the reference unit. Once detected by
DataSuite, right-click on the logger icon and select Setup.
2. Configure the setup window according to the setup which should appear on all
units you are about to deploy. Once the setup is complete for all Setup tabs click
the Setup button.
3. Right-click on the logger icon again and this time select Setup File > Save
Setup.
4. Enter the setup file name, and save it in the relevant location.
The file name extension is .MXSetup.
5. Next, go to Devices > Auto Setup Mode > Add Setup File and browse to the
setup file saved in the previous step. Click Open to load the file.
6. The Setup file name will be listed in the Auto Setup Mode menu. Once the file is
added the Auto Setup Mode is automatically enabled. You can add up to three
separate setup files to this list. To enable Auto Setup Mode in future, just select
the relevant file from the list.
7. A semi-transparent info box will appear in the lower right corner of the DataSuite
window.
218
As long as Auto Setup Mode is enabled, this info box will appear. You are able to
drag it anywhere in your DataSuite Map View. This box provides the following
information:
a. The Serial Number of the unit currently being configured with the default
setup
b. The setup status (Processing or Done)
c. The total number of units which were setup in the current Auto Setup session.
If you connect the same unit more than once, it will receive the setup but will
not be counted again in the total number of units.
8. When you connect the first unit the following window will pop up:
If you wish to automatically run each unit following setup, ensure Run after setup
is selected. Otherwise, unselect the checkbox and the logger will remain in Stop
mode.
9. Select the Don't prompt me again during this session checkbox so you don't
have to click OK to approve the setup when each unit is connected, therefore
making the whole process move very quickly. Click OK.
10. When you have finished with the Auto Setup mode, go to Devices > Auto Setup
Mode > Disable Auto Setup. The info box will disappear and upon PicoLite
detection, it won't undergo automatic setup.
17.18. Entering Alarm Reason in CFR Mode
In the DataSuite CFR software, and as part of the CFR requirements, any recorded
sensor alarm must be assigned an explanation why the alarm occurred.
Whenever an alarm is recorded the Alarm Reason icon
will flash in the upper
DataSuite toolbar. It will continue to flash until all alarms are assigned a Reason.
When exiting the application a system message will pop up warning that there are
alarms without an explanation.
To add an alarm reason:
219
1. Click the Alarm Reason icon to open the Update Alarm Reason dialog.
Figure 92: Update Alarm Reason dialog
2. Select the relevant alarm from the drop-down menu and enter the reason in the
text box.
3. Click OK when finishing entering all alarm reason. The Alarm reason icon will
now be disabled:
.
4. The alarm reasons will be updated in the DatPass database and will appear in
the DatPass Audit Trail.
17.19. Alarm Notifications Setup
Once you have completed the logger alarm setup, you can configure DataSuite to
send alarm notifications via Email or SMS.
From the Tools menu select one of the following options, depending on the type of
notifications required:

Email Alarm Notification

SMS Alarm Notification
Or click the Email
or SMS
launch the notification dialog.
icons located in the upper toolbar in order to
Note: To enable sending of Email or SMS first define the Email and SMS settings in
the Tools > Options dialog. Connect a GSM modem to the PC if sending SMS’s.
Refer to section ‎17.9 on page 173 for more details.
You may manage your contact list of alarm notification recipients from either the
Manage Contacts menu item in the Tools menu, or from within the Alarm
Notification dialog itself.
As the Email and SMS Alarm Notifications must be defined separately, they each
have separate dialogs. However the interface is identical and the contacts are stored
in the same database.
The Email/SMS Notifications dialog is divided into the following tabs:

Notifications Setup

Contacts tab

Groups tab
220
17.19.1. Contacts Tab
The first step is to create the contacts who shall be receiving the notifications. The
ability to manage contacts is possible from both the Email and SMS Notifications
dialogs.
1. Click the Contacts tab and then click Add Contact.
Figure 93: Adding a contact
2. In this dialog you must first enter the contact name in the Name field. That is the
only mandatory field but if you don’t enter at least the phone number or Email
then they won’t receive any alarm notifications.
The other fields in the dialog are as follows:
221
 Title: Corporate position
 Phone number: The number the DataSuite software will use to send the
SMS notification.
 Note: The phone number field supports the following characters: 0-9, # , *, -, (
), +
 Email: The address the DataSuite software will use to send the Email
notification.
 Workday Start and End: You can define the hours in which the contact will
be eligible to receive the notifications i.e. so they don’t receive SMS or Email
while in the office, or vice versa.
 Vacation: You can define when the contact is on vacation so they won’t
receive any notifications over this period.
 Number of SMS resends: The number of times DataSuite will send follow-up
SMS’s with the alarm notification. The maximum is nine resends per alarm.
The gap between each resend is five minutes.
Note: In order to stop receiving SMS resends, you can simply send an SMS
with ‘OK’ in the message body to the GSM SIM card’s phone number.
3. When the contact details have been entered, click OK.
4. The contact will be added to the Contacts tab. You may choose to add another
contact, edit an existing contact or remove a contact from the list.
17.19.2. Groups Tab
1. Click the Groups tab and then click Add Group. The Group Details dialog will
open.
Figure 94: Adding a group
2. Enter a Group name and add your existing contacts to the group by selecting the
checkbox next to the Contact name.
3. Click OK to create the Group. In the Groups tab you may choose to add a group,
edit an existing group or remove a group from the list.
222
17.19.3. Notifications Setup Tab
1. Once the contacts have been created you may start defining which contacts
should receive the alarm notifications.
2. The pane on the left-hand side of the Notifications Setup tab displays all the
units, loggers or DataNet Repeaters and their serial numbers, which have been
configured in your network. You must define the alarm notifications for each unit
in turn. Select the first unit you wish to define.
3. The Email or SMS tab is now active for the unit selected in step 1 above. In this
tab, select the type of alarm for which the notification should be sent in the event
that the predefined alarm level is breached.
4. Only the sensors which were configured in the logger Setup, with alarms levels,
are enabled in this tab. In addition, any online DataNet Repeater will be enabled
for sending battery alarm or reception alarm notifications.
Figure 95: SMS and Email notification setup
5. Select the checkboxes according to the type of sensor alarm for which
notifications should be sent.
You may also select the following alarms:
a. Battery alarm: Notification will be sent for low battery alarm when battery
level is at or drops below 10%. When the battery level goes above 10%
again, when unit is connected to AC power, another email notification is sent
stating the battery is charging.
b. Reception alarm: For DataNet units, an Offline alarm notification will be sent
when there is no RF reception from a unit. When the unit is back online, an
online notification is sent.
c. Normalized: Notification will be sent when the logger return to normal levels
having been in alarm.
6. Click the Contact button adjacent to each of the sensors which have defined
alarms. In the Select Contact dialog, select the contact and/or group that will
receive the notification.
7. You can also click Check All to select all the sensor alarms for notification.
223
Note: If the DataNet logger transmission rate is slower than the sampling rate, an
alarm notification is still sent even if the logger transmission time hasn’t passed.
For example, if the sampling rate is every 5 minutes, and the transmission rate is
every 10 minutes, if a logger reaches a high alarm after 7 minutes a notification
will be sent. The system won’t wait until the scheduled transmission time.
17.19.4. Email and SMS Notification Formats
Email Notification Format
When the Email notification is sent the recipient receives the Email in the following
format:
Email Header:
DataNet Alarm: Internal Temperature High Alarm, Value Detected: 25.47C)
Email Body:
DataNet Alarm
Comment: Factory 1/F
S/N: 808932
08-07-09 13:53:41
Internal Temperature Low Alarm,
Value Detected: 25.47 C
The Email header contains the sensor type, last recorded sample, and alarm type.
In addition the Email body contains the logger comment, serial number, time stamp
of last sample and value of last sample.
SMS Notification Format
When the SMS notification is sent the recipient receives the SMS in the following
format. (The logger comment is displayed in the first row).
S/N 515244, Test 810#2, Int. Temperature 15/1/10 17:25 – High Alarm, Value
Detected: 24.24C
17.20. Calibration Overview
All Fourtec data loggers are shipped in compliance with their published accuracy
specifications (see Appendices for detailed logger specs). Depending on the logger
model, either a printed calibration certificate is included with the logger packaging or
a Declaration of Accuracy certificate is available for download on the Fourtec
website.
DataSuite software includes a Calibration feature providing users with the capability
to calibrate all data logger inputs. The calibration process involves adjusting the
measured values of the logger, in order to improve accuracy which may be affected
by external sensor deviations, sensor drift over time, or environmental conditions.
As with any calibration process, a certified calibration instrument must be available to
provide an accurate reference for data logger measurements. For example, an
electrical or multi-functional calibrator is suitable for voltage or current inputs and a
climate chamber or bath is suited for temperature and humidity measurements. A
certified external calibration laboratory as well as Fourtec's own calibration facility
may be used to perform this task, as well as the customer's own equipment.
224
Note: The calibration procedure is recommended to be performed at least once a
year, or as needed in order to verify that logger readings meet their specifications.
17.20.1. Recommended Calibration Methodology
The standard calibration process for all Fourtec loggers involves the following steps:
1. Verification of logger accuracy:
a. You must first verify the accuracy of the relevant inputs by running the logger
and comparing the input readings against a known, accurate reference.
b. If all recorded readings are within their published specifications, then you may
choose to skip calibration. If the readings are not within spec, or if they are but
you decide to calibrate anyway, proceed to Step 2.
c. You may choose to skip Step 1 and proceed directly to Step 2 if you already
know that the logger is inaccurate or if you wish to calibrate regardless of
logger accuracy.
2. Logger calibration:
a. Once you have decided that the logger requires calibration, you must reset
the calibration settings of the input/sensor and repeat Step 1a, comparing the
logger readings using a reference.
Note: Resetting the calibration settings is a critical step as calibration must be
performed on the logger's raw values, clean of any previous calibration settings. To
reset calibration, refer to section ‎17.20.3.
b. Once you have completed Step 2a and recorded the logger readings for the
relevant inputs/sensors, you are able to perform the actual calibration
procedure.
c. Use the detailed calibration instructions provided in sections ‎17.20.3‎17.20.4
and ‎17.20.5 to understand how to calibrate the logger using DataSuite
software.
d. Following completion of calibration procedure in Step 2c, you must verify the
logger readings are now accurate by repeating Step 1a.
e. If accuracy according to the specifications is still not achieved following the
second round of verification, then you may further adjust the readings using
the Offset calibration method as described in section 17.20.5.
Note: When calibrating inputs which are connected to external sensors, e.g. PT-100
or NTC temperature sensors, remember that the calibration is specific to both the
input and connected sensor at the time of calibration. If you replace this sensor with
another one, you might experience temperature deviations even though you
calibrated the input.
Please contact Fourtec's help desk or your local distributor with any questions
regarding the calibration procedure.
225
17.20.2. Logger Calibration Methods
DataNet and DaqLink Sensor Inputs
Sensor
Type
Calibration Method
Current
4 – 20 mA
Two-point calibration and offset
Humidity
(Internal)
Digital
Two-point calibration and offset
Temperature
(Internal)
Digital
Offset calibration
Temperature
(Internal)
PT-100
Two-point calibration and offset
Temperature
PT-100 2-wire
Two-point calibration and offset
Temperature
Thermocouple J
Offset calibration
Temperature
Thermocouple K
Offset calibration
Temperature
Thermocouple T
Offset calibration
Voltage
0 to 1 V
Two-point calibration and offset
Voltage
0 to 50 mV
Two-point calibration and offset
MicroLite II Sensor Inputs
Sensor
Type
Calibration Method
Temperature
(Internal)
Digital
(LITE5032P-RH)
Two-point calibration
Temperature
(Internal)
NTC
(LITE5008P,
LITE5032P)
Three-point calibration
Humidity (Internal)
Digital
(LITE5032P-RH)
Two-point calibration
External Current *
4 – 20 mA
(LITE5032P-4/20)
Two-point calibration
Voltage *
0 to 10 V
(LITE5032P-V)
Two-point calibration
External
Temperature *
NTC 10K
(LITE5032P-EXT)
Three-point calibration
* Online calibration is not supported, as external sensor cannot be connected to cap
while logger is connected to computer via USB
226
MicroLogPRO II Sensor Inputs
Sensor
Type
Calibration Method
Temperature
(Internal)
Digital (EC850)
Temperature
(Internal)
NTC (EC800)
Humidity
(Internal)
Digital (EC850)
Two-point calibration
External Current
4 – 20 mA
Two-point calibration
External Voltage
0 to 10 V
Two-point calibration
External
Temperature
NTC 10K
Three-point calibration
Two-point calibration
Three-point calibration
Note: When switching between external inputs of the MicroLogPRO II, you must
perform the Reset Calibration for the specific external input within the Calibration
window, before running the logger. This is because this device can only retain
calibration settings of one external input type at a time and switching from one
external input to another will result in incorrect readings unless you reset the
calibration settings.
PicoLite Sensor Inputs
Sensor
Temperature
(Internal)
Type
Calibration Method
NTC
Two-point calibration
17.20.3. Calibration Procedure
Follow the procedures outlined below for calibrating your Fourtec data logger using
DataSuite.
Note: The calibration settings are saved to the logger memory so there is no need to
calibrate the logger every time you run the software.
Use the Logger Data pane to
verify your logger readings in
real-time. You can also view the
logger’s general status.
Figure 96: MicroLogPRO II Calibration dialog
227
1. From the Map View, open the Logger context menu and select Stop, as
calibration must be performed when logger is in Stop mode.
2. Select Calibration > Calibrate and enter the password in the Password dialog
(default password is 1234).
3. Select the sensor you wish to calibrate from the Sensor drop-down menu.
4. For DataNet/DaqLink loggers:
a. Ensure that the DataNet (DNL9XX) or DaqLink logger has completed a full
charging cycle of at least 16 hours prior to proceeding with logger calibration.
Refer to sections ‎3.5.1 (for DataNet) and ‎6.4 (for DaqLink) for more details on
the charging cycle.
b. If calibrating an external sensor, select the inputs to calibrate. Select All or an
individual input, 1 to 4.
c. Click Apply to send the sensor setup to the logger.
d. If you selected All inputs, then by default the logger will be setup to log data
on Input 1 during the calibration process. Otherwise, if you selected a specific
input, it will setup the logger to calibrate on that input.
5. Click Reset Calibration.
Note: If performing Offset calibration, Reset Calibration is not required.
6. You may now begin entering the calibration values, based on the relevant
calibration method e.g. two or three-point, Offset.
17.20.4. Performing a Two or Three-point Calibration
The purpose of using two or three reference points when calibrating your logger is to
ensure accuracy over a specific measurement range e.g. using 2 °C and 8 °C as
reference points for applications involving vaccine measurement.
The two or three-point calibration sets the gain (slope) and offset (intercept) of the
sensor's conversion function.
DataSuite provides default reference values for each input, for both two and three
point calibration. You may also enter custom values relevant to your application's
required measurement range. In either case, the reference values used to calculate
the calibration settings must reflect the actual recorded values of the reference
equipment e.g. if the climate chamber recorded 33.2% when set to measure 33%,
then you must enter 33.2% as the reference value.
In some cases you may need to refine your calibration using the Offset method (refer
to section ‎17.20.5).
Note: Two or three-point calibration must not be performed over a previous two or
three-point calibration. This includes following restoration of default factory
calibration.
228
Reference Value and Logger Value per Point

The Reference Value is the reading of the reference measuring device e.g.
climate chamber, electrical calibrator, etc, for the input you need to calibrate.

The Logger Value is the reading of the specific logger input, recorded at the
same exact time as the Reference value. This value can be obtained by referring
to the logger data graph while the logger was running, or taken online directly
from the Logger Data pane when performing online calibration.
Figure 97: Two-point calibration window
Figure 98: Three-point calibration window
1. Enter the Reference Value and corresponding Logger Value for each point.
Note: If you are performing an online calibration e.g. using a calibrator, the logger
displays the value to be calibrated, press the Copy button to copy the real value to
the Logger Value text box.
2. Press Send Calibration to send these values to the logger.
3. If performing an online calibration, you can compare the real value in the Logger
Data pane to the reference value. If the values are within an acceptable margin of
error you may close the Calibration window, or move on to calibrate additional
inputs.
4. If performing an offline calibration, you must run the logger again in order to verify
the logger readings in accordance with the calibration methodology outlined in
section ‎17.20.1 above.
5. If the measured values are still not within spec following verification, use Offset
calibration to fine tune the values further (if Offset is indeed supported).
229
17.20.5. Performing an Offset Calibration
Offset calibration method is used as follows:

To calibrate inputs supporting Offset calibration only e.g. Thermocouple for
DataNet/DaqLink loggers

To fine tune logger readings calibrated using two or three-point calibration
method

To fine tune individual inputs for DataNet or DaqLink loggers, following two or
three-point calibration method applied on All inputs
The offset value is the difference between the value displayed by the logger and the
reference value. For example, if the reference reading shows 0 °C and the logger
reads 1 °C the offset value is 1, but if the logger reads 1 °C then the offset value is
1.
To perform an Offset calibration:
1. From the Calibration window, once the relevant input has been selected click the
Offset calibration radio button to enable the Offset window.
2. Enter the offset value in the Offset field and click Send Calibration.
3. Continue to adjust the offset accordingly until satisfied with the measured
readings.
17.20.6. Calibrating the Internal Temperature Sensor for
DataNet and DaqLink Loggers
The DataNet DNL910 and DNL910-PA, and DaqLink DBSA710 internal temperature
sensor uses a PT-100 sensor element. Calibration of this sensor is performed by
calibrating the external PT-100 input i.e. two-point calibration followed by Offset
calibration.
1. In the Calibration dialog, select PT-100 in the Sensor drop-down menu and select
All inputs.
2. Press Setup to proceed.
3. Connect a calibrator or an actual PT-100 sensor to Input-1. Calibrate the input
using the reference values.
17.20.7. Calibrating the External PT-100 Sensor Input
DataNet and DaqLink PT-100 calibration is a standard two-point calibration followed
by Offset calibration. Once the PT-100 sensor has been selected in the Sensor dropdown menu, click the Reset Calibration button. Then proceed with the two-point
calibration procedure.
Before each calibration this step must be performed otherwise the calibration will not
be accurate.
Once this calibration procedure is complete both the logger’s internal temperature
sensor (PT-100) and external PT-100 inputs will be calibrated.
230
17.20.8. Calibrating Thermocouple Inputs

To calibrate the Thermocouple temperature sensors: TC-J, TC-K and TC-T, first
calibrate the 50 mV sensor type. That will set the slope for all Thermocouple
temperature sensors. Then proceed to adjust the offset using the Offset
calibration technique.

You may calibrate all thermocouple sensor types at once, or individually.

Do not calibrate the thermocouple when the device is connected to the AC
charger. The charging mechanism causes the unit's PCB to heat up, which in turn
causes the onboard temperature sensor to heat up. As it is used for temperature
compensation when calibrating the thermocouples, it may adversely affect the
accuracy of the calibration.
17.20.9. Saving and Loading DataNet and DaqLink
Calibration Settings
The DataSuite software enables you to calibrate any of the logger inputs and saves
the calibration parameters to the logger's onboard memory.
Saving Calibration Settings
At any time you may manually save the logger’s calibration settings locally to your
PC.
1. Open the logger context menu, select Calibration > Save Calibration and enter
the password to access this feature.
2. The Save As dialog will open. Name the calibration file (with extension .dcf) and
save it either in the default Calibration folder in the DataSuite directory or in a
folder of your choice.
Note: The default file name is the logger Comment so it is recommended to change
file name to the logger serial number.
Loading Calibration Settings
1. You can load a previously saved DataSuite .dcf calibration file at any time to
restore a logger’s restore specific calibration settings.
2. Open the logger context menu, select Calibration > Load Calibration and enter
the password to access this feature.
3. In the Open dialog, browse to the calibration file you need and click Open. The
logger will be updated with the new calibration settings.
17.20.10. New Calibration Mechanism when Updating
MicroLite and MicroLogPRO II Firmware
In new firmware released in January 2013 for MicroLite and MicroLogPRO II data
loggers, a fundamental redesign of the calibration mechanism has made necessary
the removal of existing calibration settings from the logger memory.
These changes were made in MicroLite II firmware v1.01 and MicroLogPRO II
firmware v2.00. Upgrading to these versions will result in existing calibration settings
being erased, including the default factory settings.
231
Note: Calibration settings are erased only when updating firmware from MicroLite II
v0.95 or MicroLogPRO II v1.31. Any subsequent firmware update from v1.01 or
v2.00 to newer versions will not affect existing calibration settings.
To retain existing calibration settings, do not update your loggers with the new
firmware. If unsure, consult Fourtec technical support.
Saving Calibration as Factory Default
If you proceed with the firmware update, DataSuite provides the user with one
opportunity to save any calibration performed on these devices as the default
calibration settings which cannot then be erased. The option Save Factory
Calibration Default will be available via the logger Calibration menu after firmware
update to above-mentioned versions.
Generally, DataSuite does not allow the user to save calibration settings as factory
default but in this case an exception has been made in order to ensure that the user
can always restore default values that were tested and are within spec.
17.21. Analyzing the Data
When in offline (History View) or online data displays, you have a number of features
for analyzing the on-screen data. The features for analyzing data while in the graph
display are practically the same when in offline or online mode.
17.21.1. Using the Graph Features
The following section explains how to use the numerous graph analysis features,
including an overview of the graph toolbar options.
Please first refer to section ‎17.5.5: DataSuite Toolbar Icons for a full overview of the
graph toolbar.
Autoscaling
Click Autoscale
on the graph toolbar to view the full data display, thereby
restoring the axis range to its default settings.
Zooming
To zoom in to a specific area of the graph:
1. Click Zoom in
on the graph toolbar.
2. Drag the cursor diagonally to select the area you want to magnify. Release the
mouse button to zoom in to the selected area.
3. Click Zoom in
a second time to disable the zoom tool.
4. Click Autoscale to restore the default display.
232
Panning
Use the Pan tool
to pan along the x or y axis or after zooming in, to see any part
of the graph that is outside the zoomed area.
1. Click Pan
on the graph toolbar, then click anywhere on the graph and drag
the mouse to view another area.
2. Click the Pan icon a second time to disable the Pan tool.
The Cursor
You can display up to two cursors on the graph simultaneously.
Use the first cursor to display individual data recording values.
Use two cursors to display the difference between two coordinate values, to display
the frequency of periodic data or to select a range of data points.
Figure 99: Example of using two cursors
When using two cursors, the Statistics feature will calculate statistics according to the
data set between the two cursors.
To display the first cursor:
Click 1st Cursor
on the graph toolbar. You can drag the cursor with the mouse
onto any other point on the plot, or onto a different plot. For finer cursor movements
use the forward and backward keys on the keyboard.
The coordinate values of the selected point will appear in the information bar at the
bottom of the graph window.
To display the second cursor:
Click 2nd Cursor
and drag the cursor with the mouse onto any other point on the
plot. The information bar will now display the difference between the two coordinate
values.
To remove the cursors:
Click the cursor icons a second time.
233
Grid
Click the Grid icon
to add a grid to the background of the graph view. To remove
the grid, click the icon again.
Figure 100: Graph with grid in background
Show/Hide Time Stamps
By default, the Time Stamp icon
is enabled to display in the online or offline
graph, any time stamp marked using the MicroLite or MicroLogPRO II data loggers.
Refer to section ‎17.21.2 for more details.
Add Custom View
Whenever the graph in History View is modified, either by using the Zoom tool,
changing the scale, panning the graph, etc. you have the option to add this customer
graph view to the Data Map, under the Custom Views node. This will enable you to
save projects which include the custom graph view for future reference.
Click the Add Custom View icon
to perform this function.
Copying the Graph
Click the Copy Graph icon
to copy the graph to the clipboard, and paste it into
another application, such as a word processing or spreadsheet application.
Displaying Alarm Levels
Open the Alarm drop-down menu and select the relevant sensor to display its alarm
levels.
The Stretch/Compress Axis Tool
Move the cursor onto one of the graph axes. The cursor icon changes to the double
arrow symbol (↔), indicating that you can stretch or compress the axis scale. Drag
the cursor to the desired location. Repeat the procedure for the other axis if
necessary.
To select a data set to display on the Y-axis, click on the data set’s name in the
Y-axis list. To display more than one curve, click on the data sets you want.
234
Formatting the Graph
You can change the plot line’s color and width. The color of the Y-axis matches the
corresponding plot’s color and will automatically change with any change made to the
color of the corresponding plot.
1. Click Graph properties
on the graph toolbar.
2. Click the Style tab, and unselect the Use system line properties checkbox.
3. Select the axis you want to format in the Axis drop-down menu.
4. Select the color and line width.
5. Click OK.
6. To restore the default formatting, select the Use system line properties
checkbox again.
Manual Scaling
1. Click Graph properties
on the graph toolbar.
2. Select the Axis Scaling tab and with the Group plots by units checkbox
unselected, select the axis to manually scale from the drop-down menu e.g. Date
& Time axis.
3. Uncheck the Autoscale check box and enter the custom values in the text box
i.e. a time range, in the case of the Time & Date axis, or a set of values.
4. Click OK.
5. To restore auto scaling select the Autoscale checkbox.
Manual Scaling - Grouping Plots by Unit
You may choose to group all of the sensors measuring the same unit, to the same
scale. For example, if you have several temperature sensors in your data set, all
measuring Celsius, you can apply a common scale when displaying the data from
these sensors.
1. Click Graph properties
on the graph toolbar.
2. Select the Axis Scaling tab and select the Group plots by units checkbox.
3. In the Axis drop-down menu select the unit by which you wish to group the plots.
4. Uncheck the Autoscale check box and enter the custom values in the text box.
5. Click OK.
6. To restore auto scaling select the Autoscale checkbox.
Figure 101: Grouping plots by units
235
17.21.2. Viewing Time Stamps
MicroLite or MicroLogPRO II users may mark time stamps on the logger memory to
indicate specific events, and later view them in DataSuite software.
In the Online and Offline graph views, the lower toolbar features a Time Stamp icon
. By default it is enabled to display all time stamps marked in the current data set.
Each time stamp is marked as a large dot in the same color as the sensor plot:
Scrolling over the time stamp marker will display the time stamp comment, which by
default is the time stamp of the sample itself.
Viewing the time stamp in Table View
Each time stamp is displayed in the data table in addition to the regular samples
taken at the defined sampling rate. The time stamp is highlighted in yellow, and a
default comment is listed in the Comment column, per device.
To edit the time stamp comment simply click on the relevant cell and enter the
desired comment.
Statistics View
The Statistics View also includes the time stamp when calculating Min, Max, and
average.
Export to Excel
Time stamps are also exported to Excel along with the rest of the data set.
Each time stamp is easily indicated by its comment in the Time Stamp Comment
column:
236
17.21.3. Changing the Graph, Table or Statistics View Header
Each Graph, Table or Statistics tab has a header located above the specific view.
The default headers are:

DataSuite - Graph

DataSuite - Table

DataSuite - Statistics
The header will also be included when printing the graph.
To change the header:
1. Click Graph Properties
on the graph toolbar.
2. Click the Style tab and enter the graph header in the Header field.
17.21.4. Statistical Analysis
DataSuite also provides some basis statistics regarding the open data sets. While in
History View or online Data Display view, click the Statistics tab.
For each of the sensors in the data set, you will have the following statistics
displayed:

Minimum / Maximum values

Average value

Number of samples
You will also see the Logger name and SN, as well as the start and end time of the
statistics data range.
While in online mode these statistics are updated in real-time.
If you zoom onto a section of the graph, the statistics are dynamic and will therefore
display statistics of the zoomed graph, not of the whole graph.
If using the cursors, the statistics will be calculated according to the data set between
the two cursors.
Figure 102: Statistics View
237
17.22. Exporting Data to Excel or CSV Formats
DataSuite supports exporting data to Excel or CSV file formats (CSV stands for
comma separated values).
To export to Excel, click Export to Excel
in the online or offline lower graph
toolbar, or go to Analysis > Export to Excel (while viewing data in History View).
The data currently displayed on the graph is exported. Data from more than one data
logger may be exported simultaneously.
DataSuite will then open a new Excel workbook displaying the data as well as other
pertinent information such as logger comment, serial number and the alarm level
setup. Data that exceeds any of the alarm levels will be indicated.
Figure 103: Example of data exported to Excel
Only offline data opened in History View can be exported to CSV and is available
under the Analysis menu.
17.23. Printing the Data
You are able to print data by clicking the Print icon
from the lower toolbar in
Graph, Table or Statistics tabs of the offline or online data displays. Clicking the Print
icon will open the Print Setup dialog where you will need to select the printer to print
to.
When printing a table, you can select the specific data range you wish to print. You
are able to adjust the date and time in order to narrow the data range.
Figure 104: Printing a table
238
17.24. Reports Module
The Reports module provides an intuitive interface for creating and generating
DataSuite reports. Each report contains a wide range of parameters garnered from
all units supported by the software. Each report can be sent via e-mail to a selected
distribution list, at pre-defined time intervals, in PDF and Excel format.
All reports are saved in the default directory:
C:\Program Files\Fourtec\DataSuite\Reports
To change this path go to the Preferences tab in Tools > Options.
17.24.1. Creating a Report Profile
The first step when creating a report is to create a new Report Profile. The user can
create multiple profiles, each configured with different parameters. To generate a
report, at least one profile must be enabled.
1. Go to Reports > Reports Profile Manager in the main menu, or click the
corresponding icon
in the upper toolbar.
2. Enter the system password. The Reports Profile Manager window will open.
3. Click Create New Profile.
Figure 105: Reports Profile Manager window
4. Select the Enable Report Profile checkbox to enable all fields in the window.
Each profile that is enabled will have a report generated. If no profiles are
enabled, DataNet will not generate any reports.
5. Enter a suitable profile name in the Profile Name field.
6. Enter your name in the Report Generated By field.
7. Enter a description of the report in the Report Comment field.
239
8. Each report created in PDF format contains a header. To change the report’s
header, select the PDF Header Image checkbox and click Browse to locate the
relevant image. The default Fourtec header is:
9.
Note: The recommended header dimensions are 525 x 50 pixels, 72 dpi. If a header
with different dimensions is loaded, then the software will automatically resize the
header dimensions.
10. Toggle the temperature unit to appear on the report, if any of the logger’s are
configured to measure temperature.
11. Select the Display Alarm Levels on Report option to show on the report graph,
the actual alarm levels which were configured. Using this option you can tell
immediately if the measured data strayed above or below the defined alarm
levels.
In the example below you can see the low and high alarm limits, and notice that
the data is within these limits.
12. Next to Report Format, select the checkbox next to the required format in which
to generate the report. Excel, PDF or both formats. For PDF format, select the
page size, A4 or Letter, from the drop-down menu.
13. Click the Generated Report checkbox to send the report via email to a selected
distribution list. Click Contacts to open your contact list and select the relevant
contacts to receive the report via e-mail. If your contact list is empty then the
Select Contacts window will automatically open when first clicking Generated
Report.
Note: To send reports via e-mail, ensure the DataSuite e-mail settings are
correctly configured in Tools > Options > e-mail Settings.
14. The DataSuite CFR module provides the ability to send reports for Review and
Approval by users with specific privileges to review and/or approve reports
generated by the software. Select Reviewed Report and/or Approved Report and
select the required contacts from the Contacts dialog. Recipients of these reports
will be able to enter the DataSuite CFR using their assigned username and in the
Reports Browser, declare the report was reviewed or approved.
15. In the Report Type pane, select at least one of the report type checkboxes. You
will not be able to save the profile unless a report type has been selected.
16. The available types are below. For more details regarding each type, refer to
section ‎17.24.2:
240
 Alarm Log
 Events Log
 Unit Setup Log
 Unit Statistics
 Sent Email Log
 Sent SMS Log
 Received SMS Log
 Sensors Graph
 Sensor Histogram
17. Once a Report Type has been selected, immediately click Save Profile to avoid
losing your unsaved profile.
18. Use the Report Time pane to select the interval when the report will be
generated and emailed to the contact list (if desired):
a. Next to Generate Report at select the time when the report should be
generated.
Note: To allow for data samples recorded in the last minute prior to the
defined time, the report will actually be generated 10 minutes after the defined
time.
b. Select the date when the report should be generated. The options are daily,
weekly or monthly. Select the specific day for the latter two options.
c. The user can also select a report according to a specific time period. Select
the User Defined option, choose the period and click Generate to manually
generate the report according to the defined parameters.
19. Use the Units pane to select which loggers should be included on the report
itself.
a. Select the All Units checkbox to include all network units.
b. To include a specific selection of units, unselect the All Units checkbox and
manually select the checkbox for each unit.
c. The order in which the units will appear on the report can be defined
according to Serial Number by selecting By S/N and clicking the S/N header
or manually, by selecting Manual and clicking the Up and Down arrows.
d. The definition of the report is now complete. Click Save Profile and then
Close to exit the Reports Profiles Manager. A report will be generated at the
defined time.
17.24.2. Report Types
Each report contains at least one Report Type, with the data displayed in table
format. A description of each Report Type parameter in the Reports Profile Manager
is provided below.
Alarm Log

Parameters include sensor name, setup, alarm parameters, and setup time. In
addition, each sensor alarm value is listed according to the relevant setup. If
there are other setups in the report time frame then additional setup tables and
alarm tables will be displayed.

Battery and Reception alarms will be listed after the sensor alarms.
241

If no alarms were recorded during the report time frame, a No Alarm Events
message will be displayed.
Events Log
Logs all events of each logger in the Report, as well as the time of the event. The
events are:

Setup

Run

Stop

Connection to network

Disconnection from network

Firmware updated, including indication of previous and updated firmware version

Leave Network
Unit Setup Log

Logs all the setups of the logger during the logging period

If no setups were performed during the report time frame the a No New Setup
message will be displayed
Unit Statistics
Displays statistics for each sensor in the report. The calculated parameters are:

Min

Max

Average

Number of samples
Sent Email Log
Logs all emails that were sent during the report time frame.
The details in the Sent Emails Log are:

Message that was sent

Date

Time

To whom the message was sent (groups will be displayed as groups)
Sent SMS Log
Logs all SMS’s that were sent during the report time frame.
The details in the Sent SMS Log are:

Message that was sent

Date

Time

To whom the message was sent (groups will be displayed as groups)
242
Received SMS Log
Logs all SMS’s that were sent to the DataSuite software during the report time frame.
The details in the Received SMS Log are:

Message that was received

Date

Time

From whom the message was sent
Sensor Graph
The Sensor Graph log includes the following parameters:

Unit comment and S/N indicated as the graph header

Indication of sensor name, sensor type, start time & date and end time & date
under each graph

A small graph of each sensor that is defined in the logger with its alarm levels
displayed according to the alarm colors. The graph will be created according to
the last logger setup.

The graph scaling will be set to autoscale

The graph will include grid lines

The alarm levels will be marked according to the alarm color and the alarm limit
value will be indicated on the Y- axis

The graph dimensions will be 7.5 cm x 10.5 cm
Sensor Histogram

Unit comment and S/N indicated as the graph header

Under each Histogram there will be indication of the sensor name, sensor type,
start time & date and end time & date

A small histogram of each sensor defined in the logger will be displayed

The histogram will include an indication of the value of each bin on top of the bin

The graph dimensions will be 7.5 cm x 10.5 cm
17.24.3. Removing a Report Profile
To remove an existing report profile:
1. Go to Reports > Reports Profile Manager in the main menu, or click the
corresponding icon
in the upper toolbar.
2. In the Profile list on the left side of the window, right-click the Report name to be
removed and select Remove from the context menu.
3. Enter the system password and when prompted, confirm the action.
243
17.24.4. The Report Browser
Use the Report Browser to:

Open or delete generated reports saved in the Reports folder in the default
DataSuite directory.

For DataSuite CFR module only, assign a Reviewed By or Approved By stamp on
each report, based on the user’s privilege as defined in DatPass.
Reports are displayed per Profile.
1. Go to Reports > Report Browser in the main menu, or click the corresponding
icon
in the upper toolbar. The Report Browser window will open.
2. Select one of the profiles in the Profiles pane on the left side of the window. All
reports generated under that profile will appear in the main Report pane.
3. Use the Excel, PDF, Reviewed and Approved checkboxes to filter the reports to
be displayed in the Report pane.
4. To open a report click one of the reports in the list and click Open.
5. In DataSuite CFR only, to sign the PDF report (Excel reports cannot be signed),
select the specific report. The Review and Approve buttons are enabled.
6. Depending on the user’s assigned privileges, click Review or Approve. The
following dialog will pop up. Enter a Comment relating to the read report.
7. Click OK. An updated report contained the user’s relevant report sign-off,
(Reviewed or Approved) will be emailed to the user who generated the report.
8. To delete a report click one of the reports in the list and click Delete.
9. Click Close to close the Reports Browser window.
17.25. Boomerang Report Overview
Designed primarily for the goods transportation market, loggers running the
Boomerang feature are able to automatically deliver a PDF data report via email to
predefined contacts when connected to a computer.
244
Using the portable MicroLite II, MicroLogPRO II and PicoLite USB loggers, you can
monitor ambient conditions during a shipment, where a data report is required in
order to verify the integrity of the shipment.
The report can be generated at any stage during the shipment when the logger is
connected to a computer with DataSuite installed, and will include all data recorded
up to that stage of the shipment. Data is automatically and immediately sent via email
to the relevant parties upon connection. No configuration is required on the
destination computer, other than an Internet connection. A default email profile is
already defined within DataSuite.
In the event of any breach of defined thresholds, relevant action can be taken by
onsite personnel in order to ensure the goods reach their markets in optimal
conditions.
17.25.1. Boomerang Setup – Point of Origin
When configuring the data logger in order to activate the Boomerang, the user must
define the email addresses of the contacts to receive the Boomerang report. This
information is saved to the logger flash memory and is retained as part of the logger
setup, even if the battery is removed. The temperature unit (C or F) in which the data
is to be recorded is also defined.
To enable Boomerang:
1. Right-click on the logger icon the Map View and select Setup.
2. Perform logger setup using the various tabs. When complete, click on the
Boomerang Report tab.
3. Select the Include Boomerang Report checkbox. This enables the Boomerang
feature on the connected logger, allowing generation of a data report when
connected to another computer with DataSuite installed. When this checkbox is
unselected, Boomerang is not enabled on the logger.
4. Select the relevant temperature unit, C or F, for models measuring temperature.
245
5. Enter the relevant name in the Generated by field. This is normally the name of
the person responsible for the logger shipment.
6. Enter a relevant comment in the Comment field. The comment can be a brief
description of the specific shipment, so the report recipient will know which
shipment or logger it is referring to.
7. Select Display alarm levels on graph in order to display any defined low or high
alarm levels on the report graph.
8. To add the Boomerang report recipients, click the Add Contacts button and
select from the DataSuite contact list or use the Custom Email field to add
emails on-the-fly.
9. When complete, use the buttons at the bottom of the window to continue with the
logger setup.
17.25.2. Boomerang Setup – Destination Computer
By default, DataSuite (version 1.01.36 and higher) is already enabled to support
generation and sending of Boomerang reports whenever a Boomerang-enabled
logger is connected to it.
To disable Boomerang on a destination computer (the computer where the logger will
be connected during or post-shipment), go to Tools > Options > Device Settings
and unselect the Generate and send Boomerang reports automatically checkbox.
In addition, DataSuite (version 1.01.36 and higher) has a built-in default email
account so the user is not required to configure their own email account from where
the Boomerang report is sent. Of course, the user may choose to do so if necessary.
17.25.3. Boomerang Email and Report Examples
The Boomerang data report is sent to the defined contacts by the destination
computer, as soon as the logger is detected by the software, and as long as an
Internet connection is available. The report contains numerous parameters such as
data statistics, data graph, and histogram, as well as the time/date the report was
issued, and the time range of the report data.
The email includes the report PDF, and indicates the logger Serial Number and the
logger name, which in this case is ‘Fourtec’
The Boomerang report is similar in structure to a standard DataSuite report but only
contains data from the specific logger.
246
Report Cover Page example:
Report Data Graph example:
247
Chapter 18:
Updating DataSuite Software and
Firmware
DataSuite supports automatic software and firmware update whenever DataSuite is
launched, as long as the computer is connected to the Internet. The update process
is managed by Fourtec’s Uptodata client. This client checks for updated software
and firmware files located on the Fourtec server, and if any have been detected they
are downloaded and updated on the user’s computer. The user can also have
DataSuite automatically update the network units’ firmware or can choose to do so
manually.
DaqLink, MicroLogPRO II, MicroLite and PicoLite all support easy firmware update
via direct USB connection. A major benefit specific to the DataNet system is that
units’ firmware can also be updated over the air as well as via USB (except for Mini
DataNet). Without moving one deployed DataNet unit out of position in the network,
the user can send a new firmware file wirelessly to all of the data logger end units
and Repeaters. The Receiver firmware is updated via the USB cable.
In addition to automatic firmware update, the DataSuite user can also manually
update the firmware via the Firmware Update Center or from the Logger/Repeater
icon in Map View. Refer to the relevant sections in this chapter for more details.
Note: If you are updating MicroLite II v0.95 or MicroLogPRO II v1.31 firmware,
please refer to section ‎17.20.10: New Calibration Mechanism when Updating
MicroLite and MicroLogPRO II Firmware, prior to firmware update.
18.1.
Using the Uptodata Client
Use the Uptodata client to perform automatic checks for updated DataSuite software
module and firmware versions, including updated versions of this DataNet user
guide. Once downloaded, DataSuite software and device firmware is automatically
updated. However, you also have the option to manually update firmware rather than
automatically.
To use the Uptodata client follow the instructions below.
1. Ensure the computer is connected to the Internet and launch DataSuite.
2. Launch the Uptodata update client from the DataSuite main menu: Help >
Check for Updates.
3. You will be prompted to proceed to check for new updates. Click Next. The client
will then check for updates on the server, including updates to the Uptodata client
itself.
248
Figure 106: Uptodata dialog
4. Once the check is complete, any new updates will be displayed in the Uptodata
dialog. Select the checkbox next to the file you wish to update and click Next.
5. The files will be downloaded to your default application directory. Click Finish to
close the dialog once the download is complete.
6. Click the Options
Autoupdate option:
icon in the main Uptodata dialog to configure the
249
Figure 107: Uptodata configuration dialog
Note: If the update was canceled for any reason and was not completed, none of the
previous installation files will be affected.
18.2.
Updating Device Firmware
There are several ways to update firmware for your DataSuite supported hardware
units.

Automatically, using the Uptodata client. Refer to section ‎18.1.

Manually using the Firmware Update Center. Refer to section ‎18.2.2.

Manually, using the context menu on the device icons in Map View.
18.2.1. Downloading the Firmware File
There are two ways to obtain the firmware file.
1. Using the Uptodata client to download from the Fourtec server. Refer to section
‎18.1.
2. Downloading the latest firmware version directly from the Fourtec Download
Center at: www.fourtec.com
3. Uptodata downloads the firmware file, named Firmware.dfw, to the DataSuite
directory on the computer. The default path is: C:\Program
Files\Fourtec\DataSuite.
Note: The firmware file combines firmware for all DataSuite supported hardware
units into one file. There is no need to download separate files for each type of unit.
4. If you download the firmware file from the Fourtec Download Center make sure to
copy the file to the same path listed above.
5. Once the file is downloaded the next step is to update the units.
18.2.2. Using the Firmware Update Center
To launch the Firmware Update Center:
1. Once the downloaded firmware file is in the DataSuite directory, go to Tools >
Firmware Update Center from the main menu. Enter the password in the
Password dialog to access the Update Center.
250
2. If no firmware file is detected in the DataSuite directory, then an error message is
displayed and the Firmware Update Center opens with a blank screen.
3. Copy the firmware file to the directory and reopen the Firmware Update Center.
Note: The default password is 1234.
4. The Firmware Update Center dialog lists all units which were detected by the
software and displays pertinent information such as available firmware versions,
firmware update status, online/offline status and unit info.
Figure 108: Firmware Update Center dialog
5. If the unit status is Requires an update, then select the checkbox in the Update
column adjacent to the unit you wish to update. You may select as many units as
you like to update, but only two units can be updated at a time.
6. As soon as you select the Update checkbox, the command will be sent to the unit
to begin uploading the firmware. The firmware is first uploaded to the unit’s
memory and then installed. Even if the update is stalled halfway due to the unit
shutting down, for example, the unit will not lose its current firmware and so will
continue to be operable.
7. When the upload begins the Firmware Update Center status will change to
Uploading firmware file and the unit display will read Loading firmware. The
progress will also be displayed on both hardware and software.
8. When the upload is complete the unit will reset and the Firmware Update Center
will display the status No update required. The firmware version will be updated
as well.
251
Note: You can quit the firmware update at any time by unselecting the Update
checkbox in the Update Center.
9.
When the unit resets it will automatically rejoin the network (for DataNet units) or
reconnect via USB and will be in Stop mode. However the unit configuration will
still be saved. For loggers which have completed firmware update, run the logger
to start recording data again.
Checking Available Firmware Versions
1. Available firmware versions are displayed at the top of the Firmware Update
Center dialog. The information is taken from the firmware file Firmware.dfw stored
in the DataSuite directory. The same firmware file is used for all units.
Unit Status Options

Offline – unit is offline and firmware status can’t be determined.

No update required – Unit has latest firmware installed.

Uploading firmware file – Firmware file is being uploaded to the unit. Progress
is displayed in percentages.

Updating firmware – Once firmware file is uploaded then the actual firmware
update begins, overwriting the existing firmware on the unit.

Downloading – Logger unit is first downloading all data before beginning the
firmware update.

Waiting to upload firmware – Unit is in a queue to upload the firmware, as the
network can update two units at a time.
Unit Information
Additional information provided in the Firmware Update Center includes:

The unit comment/name

Serial number

Current firmware version

Unit status

Update progress
18.2.3. Manual Firmware Update via Map View Icon
Each DataSuite supported device, including data loggers and DataNet Receivers and
Repeaters, have the Update Firmware option in its Map View icon context menu.
DataNet units may have firmware updated wirelessly, or via USB. Refer to section
‎18.2.4 for an overview of DataNet USB firmware update.
1. To perform a direct update from a specific unit, open the context menu and select
Update Firmware.
2. Enter the password in the Password dialog box.
252
3. Depending on the product model, a DataSuite system message may prompt you
to confirm the update. Click Yes.
4. The firmware will begin updating and you can monitor its progress in the unit’s
tooltip.
18.2.4. DataNet Firmware Update via USB
All DataNet units with USB port can also be updated via direct USB to PC
connection. Follow the instructions below.
DNR900 Receiver
1. Connect the DNR900 to the computer via USB. Go to Devices > Detect Device
in the DataSuite main menu.
2. Right-click on the Receiver icon
context menu.
and select Update Firmware from the
3. Enter the password in the Password dialog box.
4. A DataSuite system message will prompt you to confirm the update. Click Yes.
5. The firmware will begin updating and you can monitor its progress in the unit’s
tooltip.
253
DNR900 Repeater
1. Make sure the DNR900 is in Repeater mode and joined to an existing network.
When connected to the computer via USB go to Devices > Detect Device in the
DataSuite main menu.
2. Right-click on the Repeater icon
and select Update Firmware from the
context menu.
3. Enter the password in the Password dialog box.
4. A DataSuite system message will prompt you to confirm the update. Click Yes.
5. The firmware will begin updating and you can monitor its progress in the unit’s
tooltip.
6. When complete, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect the Receiver to
continue using the DataNet system.
DNL910, DNL920 and PA Data Loggers
1. Make sure the data logger is joined to an existing network. When connected to
the computer via USB go to Devices > Detect Device in the DataSuite main
menu.
2. Right-click on the logger icon
and select Update Firmware from the context
menu.
3. Enter the password in the Password dialog box.
4. A DataSuite system message will prompt you to confirm the update. Click Yes.
5. The firmware will begin updating and you can monitor its progress in the unit’s
tooltip.
6. When complete, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect the Receiver to
continue using the DataNet system.
18.2.5. Cancelling Firmware Update
To cancel a firmware update, right-click the unit’s icon in the Map View and select the
Cancel Firmware Update option.
254
If a data logger was in Run mode prior to the firmware update, when cancelling it the
logger will resume operation in Stop mode.
18.2.6. Interrupted Firmware Update
There are several ways an in-progress firmware update may be interrupted:

Unselecting the checkbox next to the unit name in the Firmware Update Center

Disconnecting the USB from the Receiver

Disconnecting the USB from the device during USB firmware update

Exiting the DataSuite software
In each case, when the unit is back online the firmware update will automatically
resume (from the beginning of the update).
If a data logger’s firmware update was interrupted, and it was in Run mode prior to
the update, the logger will continue to run even after the interruption.
255
Appendix A:
DataNet Specifications
18.3.
DNR900, DNL910, DNL920, PA Unit Outputs
DNL910, DNL920 and PA Models
External Inputs
Four external inputs with selectable
sensor type for each input:
Internal Inputs
DNL910

PT-100 Temperature

4 to 20 mA

DNL920
0 to 1 V

Digital Temperature

0 to 50 mV

Digital Relative Humidity

PT-100 (2-wire)

Contact (Open/Closed)

Thermocouple J, K or T

Pulse counter (Input 4 only)

Frequency (Input 4 only)

User-defined sensors
DNL804
External Input
Internal Inputs
Current 4 to 20 mA
None
DNL808
External Input
Internal Inputs
NTC 10 KΩ
None
DNL810
External Input
Internal Inputs
None
Digital Temperature
Digital Humidity
Alarm Output (Output 1)
External Power Excitation
(transducers usage)
Open collector
Close position resistance: 50 Ω
12 VDC @ 300 mA
Max. Load: 50 mA, 3 V DC
Reset fuse overload protection
256
18.4.
Logger Input Specifications DNL910,
DNL920 and PA models
Internal PT-100
Temperature
Internal Digital
Temperature
Internal Digital
Relative Humidity
(DNL910)
(DNL920)
(DNL920)
Type: PT-100
Range: -20 to 50 ˚C
Type: Digital sensor
Range: -20 to 50 ˚C
Range: 5 to 95 % RH
Resolution: 0.5% RH
Resolution: 0.1 ˚C
Resolution: 0.1 ˚C
Accuracy: ±0.3 ˚C
Accuracy: ±0.5 ˚C
Accuracy: 3% RH
(software)
Temperature
Thermocouple K
4% RH (Logger LCD)
Temperature
Thermocouple T
Range: -200 to 1,000 ˚C
Range: -200 to 1,000 ˚C
Range: -200 to 400 ˚C
Resolution: 0.1 ˚C
Resolution: 0.1 ˚C
Resolution: 0.1 ˚C
Accuracy:
Accuracy:
Accuracy:
-200 to – 60 ˚C ±0.5 %
-200 to – 60 ˚C ±0.5 %
-200 to – 60 ˚C ±0.5 %
60 to 1,000 ˚C ±0.5 %
60 to 1,000 ˚C ±0.5 %
60 to 400 ˚C ±0.5 %
-60 to 60 ˚C ±0.5 ˚C
Cold junction
compensation: ±0.3 ˚C
Temperature PT-100
-60 to 60 ˚C ±0.5 ˚C
Cold junction
compensation: ±0.3 ˚C
Pulse Counter
-60 to 60 ˚C ±0.5 ˚C
Cold junction
compensation: ±0.3 ˚C
Frequency
Temperature
Thermocouple J
(2-wire)
Range: -200 to 400 ˚C
Resolution: 0.1 ˚C)
Accuracy:
-200 to - 60 ˚C ±0.5 %
60 to 400 ˚C ±0.5 %
-60 to 60 ˚C ±0.3 ˚C
4 to 20 mA
(Input 4 only)
Range: 1 to 65,536
counts
Resolution: 1 count
(Input 4 only)
Range: 20 Hz to 4 KHz
Input signal: 0 to 5 V
Input impedance: 470 Ω
Frequency range: 0 to 4
KHz
Input signal: 0 to 3.2 V
Input impedance: 470 Ω
0 to 1 V
0 to 50 mV
Range: 4 to 20 mA
Range: 0 to 1 V
Range: 0 to 50 mV
Resolution: 47.6 μA
Resolution: 200 μV
Resolution: 37 μV
Accuracy: ±0.5 %
Accuracy: ±0.5 %
Accuracy: ±0.5 %
Loop impedance: 21 Ω
Input impedance: 25
MΩ
Maximum voltage: 3.2
V
Input impedance: 25
MΩ
Maximum voltage: 3.2
V
Contact
Range: Open/Close
257
18.5.
Mini DataNet Sensor Specifications
Current
NTC 10 KΩ
(DNL804)
(DNL808)
Range: 4 to 20 mA
Range: -50 to 150 °C
Resolution: 1.16 uA
Resolution: 0.06 °C
Accuracy: 0.5 %
Accuracy:
Loop impedance: 21 Ω
-50 to 60 ˚C ±0.3 ˚C
60 to 150 ˚C ±0.5 %
Internal Digital Temperature
Internal Digital
(DNL810)
Relative Humidity
(DNL810)
Temp range: -20 to 50 °C
RH range: 5 to 95 %
Temp resolution: 0.04 °C
RH resolution: 0.5 %
Temp accuracy: ±0.4 °C
RH accuracy: ±3 %
18.6.
General Specifications
DataNet Logger Sampling Features

Memory capacity: ~59,000 samples (depending on logger configuration)

Sampling rate: Once every second to once every 18 hours

Channel separation: 80 dB
DataNet RF Network Communication

Frequency: 2.4 GHz

Network units: Up to 65,000

Data rate: 250 Kbps

Full mesh network architecture supported

128-bit network security encryption

Worldwide license-free

Transmission strength:

DNL8xx and DNL9xx: 4 dbm

DNR900, DNL9xx-PA: 17 dbm

DNR800: 20 dbm
DNR900, DNL910, DNL920, DNL910-PA and DNL920-PA Hardware
Specifications
Display

2-row LCD

16 character display
258
Power Supply

Battery:

Internal rechargeable 4.8 V, 800 mAh NiMH battery (2 batteries in series)

Battery Life:
DNR900, DNL9XX-PA: ~ 3 hours
DNL910, DNL920: Up to 10 months, depending on logger
configuration and operating conditions

AC Power:


External 12 V DC input @ 300 mA 3.6 VA
Center Negative
Operating Temperature Range

-20 to 50 ˚C

Water and dust proof: IP54
DNR900 PC Communication

USB 2.0 compliance

Mini USB type B cable
Casing

Plastic ABS box

Dimensions: 9.7 x 9.3 x 2.7 cm

Weight: 200 g

Table and wall mounting
DNR800 Hardware Specifications
Power Supply

External 12 V DC input @ 300 mA 3.6 VA

Center Negative

No internal battery
Casing

Dimensions: 6.8 x 6.8 x 2.6 cm (without the cradle and the external antenna)

Weight: Device: 61 g; Cradle: 10 g; External Antenna: 17.5 g

Table and wall mounting
Operating Temperature Range

-30 to 75 ˚C

Water and dust proof: IP54
259
Mini DataNet Hardware Specifications
DNL804, DNL808 and DNL810
Power Supply

Internal 2/3 AA lithium battery

Battery voltage range: 2V - 3.6 V

Battery life: Up to 10 months depending on sampling rate and operating
conditions
Casing

Dimensions: 68 x 68.6 x 26.5 mm (without the cradle and the external antenna)

Weight: Logger: 53 g; Cradle: 10 g; External Antenna: 17.5 g

Table and wall mounting
Operating Temperature Range

-30 to 75 ˚C

Water and dust proof: IP54
Mini DataNet Extended Battery Pack Hardware Specifications
DNL804-BXT, DNL808-BXT, DNL810-BXT
Power Supply

External battery pack

4 x AA 3.6 V lithium battery

Battery life: Up to 3 years depending on sampling rate
Casing

Dimensions
 DNL810-BXT: 10.2 x 8.8 x 5.3 cm (without the external antenna)



DNL804-BXT and DNL808-BXT: 9 x 8.8 x 5.3 cm (without the external
antenna and strain relief add-on)
Weight:

137 g not including batteries

218 g including four batteries

External Antenna: 17.5 g
Wall mounting
Operating Temperature Range

-30 to 75 ˚C

Water and dust proof: IP54
Man Machine Interface
Full keyboard operation
260
Standards Compliance
CE, FCC, FCC Canada
18.7.
System Requirements
Software
Hardware
OS Platform: Windows XP SP3, Windows
Vista and Windows 7 (32 and 64-bit)
Processor: Pentium 4, 2.0 GHz or better
Screen Resolution: Minimum 1024 x 768
Storage Memory: 250 MB available disk
space for the DataSuite application
Memory: 512 MB RAM
261
Appendix B:
DaqLink Specifications
18.8.
Data Logger Input Types
DBSA710 and DBSA720
External Inputs
Internal Inputs
Four external inputs with selectable sensor
type for each input:
DBSA710

PT-100 Temperature

4 to 20 mA

DBSA720
0 to 1 V


Digital Temperature
0 to 50 mV


Digital Relative Humidity
PT-100 (2-wire)

Contact (Open/Closed)

Thermocouple J, K or T

Pulse counter (Input 4 only)

Frequency (Input 4 only)

User-defined sensors
18.9.
DBSA710 and DBSA720 Outputs
Alarm Output (Output 1)
External Power Excitation
(transducers usage)
Open collector
Close position resistance: 50 Ω
12 VDC @ 300 mA
Reset fuse overload protection
Max. Load: 50 mA, 3 V DC
18.10. Logger Input Specifications DBSA710 and
DBSA720
Internal PT-100
Temperature
Internal Digital
Temperature
Internal Digital
Relative Humidity
(DBSA710)
(DBSA720)
(DBSA720)
Type: PT-100
Type: Digital sensor
Range: 5 to 95 % RH
Range: -20 to 50 ˚C
Range: -20 to 50 ˚C
Resolution: 0.5% RH
Resolution: 0.1 ˚C
Resolution: 0.1 ˚C
Accuracy:
Accuracy: ±0.3 ˚C
Accuracy: ±0.5 ˚C
3% RH (DataSuite
software)
4% RH (Logger LCD)
262
Temperature
Thermocouple J
Temperature
Thermocouple K
Temperature
Thermocouple T
Range: -200 to 1,000 ˚C
Range: -200 to 1,000 ˚C
Range: -200 to 400 ˚C
Resolution: 0.1 ˚C
Accuracy:
Resolution: 0.1 ˚C
Accuracy:
Resolution: 0.1 ˚C
Accuracy:
-200 to – 60 ˚C ±0.5 %
-200 to – 60 ˚C ±0.5 %
-200 to – 60 ˚C ±0.5 %
-60 to 60 ˚C ±0.5 ˚C
-60 to 60 ˚C ±0.5 ˚C
-60 to 60 ˚C ±0.5 ˚C
60 to 1,000 ˚C ±0.5 %
Cold junction
compensation: ±0.3 ˚C
Temperature PT-100
60 to 1,000 ˚C ±0.5 %
Cold junction
compensation: ±0.3 ˚C
Pulse Counter
60 to 400 ˚C ±0.5 %
Cold junction
compensation: ±0.3 ˚C
Frequency
(2-wire)
(Input 4 only)
(Input 4 only)
Range: -200 to 400 ˚C
Resolution: 0.1 ˚C)
Range: 1 to 65,536 counts
Resolution: 1 count
Range: 20 Hz to 4 KHz
Input signal: 0 to 5 V
Accuracy:
Frequency range: 0 to 4
KHz
Input signal: 0 to 5 V
Input impedance: 470 Ω
-200 to - 60 ˚C ±0.5 %
-60 to 60 ˚C ±0.3 ˚C 60 to
400 ˚C ±0.5 %
Input impedance: 470 Ω
4 to 20 mA
0 to 1 V
0 to 50 mV
Range: 4 to 20 mA
Resolution: 47.6 μA
Range: 0 to 1 V
Resolution: 200 μV
Range: 0 to 50 mV
Resolution: 37 μV
Accuracy: ±0.5 %
Accuracy: ±0.5 %
Accuracy: ±0.5 %
Loop impedance: 21 Ω
Input impedance: 25 MΩ
Input impedance: 25 MΩ
Maximum voltage: 5.2 V
Maximum voltage: 5.2 V
Contact
Range: Open/Close
18.11. General Specifications
DaqLink Logger Sampling Features

Memory capacity: ~38,000 samples in Online Mode
~59,000 samples in Optimized Memory Mode
(depending on logger configuration)

Sampling rate:

Channel separation: 80 dB
Once per second to once every 18 hours
DBSA710 and DBSA720 Hardware Specifications
Display

2-row LCD

16 character display
263
Power Supply


Battery:

Internal rechargeable 4.8 V, 800 mAh NiMH battery (2 batteries in series)

Battery Life: Up to six months depending on logger configuration
AC Power:

External 12 V DC input @ 300 mA 3.6 VA

Center Negative
Operating Temperature Range

-20 to 50 ˚C

Water and dust proof: IP54
PC Communication

USB 2.0 compliance

Mini USB type B cable
Casing

Plastic ABS box

Dimensions: 10.4 x 9.3 x 2.7 cm

Weight: 153 g

Table and wall mounting
Man Machine Interface
Full keyboard operation
Standards Compliance
CE, FCC, IC Canada
18.12. System Requirements
Software
Hardware
OS Platform: Windows XP SP3, Windows
Vista and Windows 7 (32 and 64-bit)
Screen Resolution: Minimum 1024 x 768
Processor: Pentium 4, 2.0 GHz or
better
Memory: 512 MB RAM
Storage Memory: 250 MB available
disk space for the DataSuite application
264
Appendix C:
MicroLite Specifications
18.13. General Specifications
Range
LITE5008
LITE5008P
LITE5016
LITE5032P
Internal Temp
Internal Temp
-40 to 80 °C
LITE5032P-RH
LITE5032P4/20
LITE5032PV
LITE5032PEXT
Internal Temp/RH
4-20 mA
0-10 V
External NTC
4-20 mA
0-10 V
-50 to 150 °C
Temp: -40 to 80 °C
-40 to 80 °C
RH: 5-95 %
±0.3˚C @ 0 to 60 ˚C
Accuracy
Resolution
± 0.3 ˚C
±0.3 ˚C @ -40 to 0
˚C and 60 to 80 ˚C
after calibration only
0.1 °C (display)
0.03 °C or better
0.01 °C (software)
±0.3 ˚C
Temp: ±0.3 ˚C
RH: ± 2 %RH
Temp:
0.01 °C
RH: 0.05 %RH
±20 µA
±5 mV
1 µA
(display)
1 mV
(display)
5 µA
(software)
4 mV
(software)
(after
calibration
with Fourtec
NTC sensor)
0.02 °C
or better
Maximum
Load
N/A
N/A
N/A
25 mA, 3 V
12 V
N/A
Dew Point
X
X
√
N/A
N/A
N/A
LCD
√
√
√
√
√
√
LED Alarm
Indicator
X
√
√
√
√
√
8,000 and 16,000
8,000 and 32,000
Sample
Memory
Sampling
Rate
Once per second /
once every 2 hours
32,000
(16K per channel)
32,000
Once per second / once every 18 hours
CR2032 3V
Battery Type
/ Battery Life
1.5 years,
depending on
sampling rate
CR2032 3V
2 years, depending on sampling rate and operating conditions
and operating
conditions
Operating
Environment
-40 to 80C
Dimensions
(with cap)
11 x 3.9 x 2.6 cm
11 x 3.9 x 3 cm
Weight
45.5 g
Standards
Compliance
Wall Mount
14 x 3.9 x 2.6 cm
CE, EN12830,
IP67
X
CE, EN12830,
IP54
Logger cradle accessory provided
265
18.14. System Requirements
Software
Hardware
OS Platform: Windows XP SP3,
Windows Vista and Windows 7 (32 and
64-bit)
Screen Resolution: Minimum 1024 x
768
Processor: Pentium 4, 2.0 GHz or
better
Memory: 512 MB RAM
Storage Memory: 250 MB available
disk space for the DataSuite
application
266
Appendix D:
MicroLogPRO II Specifications
18.15. General Specifications
Internal Sensor Range
Internal Temperature
Accuracy
EC800
EC850
Temp:
-40 to 80 C
Temp:
-40 to 80 C
RH: 5 to 95 %
±0.3˚C @ 0 to 60 ˚C
± 0.3 °C
±0.3 ˚C @ -40 to 0 ˚C and 60 to
80 ˚C after calibration only
Temperature Resolution
Internal Humidity Accuracy
Internal Humidity Resolution
0.02 °C
or better
N/A
0.015 C
N/A
0.05 %
± 2%
NTC Temperature: 0.3 ˚C
External Sensor Accuracy
4-20 mA: ±20 µA
0-10 V: ±5 mV
NTC Temperature: 0.03 ˚C
External Sensor Resolution
4-20 mA: 1 µA (display), 4.0 µA (software)
0-10 V: 1 mV (display), 4.0 mV (software)
Memory Capacity
52,000 Samples (over 3 channels)
Sampling Rate
Minimum: Once every second
Maximum: Once every 18 hours
LCD
Four-digits, 7-segment LCD with decimal point
Dew Point
LCD and Software indication
LED
Bi-color Alarm
PC Connection
Mini USB
Infrared Printout
N/A
Power Supply
2/3 AA 3.6V Lithium battery
Battery Life
~ 2 years depending on sampling rate and operating conditions
Dimensions
Diameter: 72 mm
Thickness: 22.9 mm
Weight
55 g
Wall Mount
Standards Compliance
Cradle accessory
CE, IP65
267
CE, IP54
18.1.
External Sensor Specifications
MicroLogPRO II External Sensors
Sensor Type
NTC Temperature
sensor with 100
mm probe
Voltage Adapter
Current Adapter
DT140-ML2
DT139
DT132N (2.5 m cable
length)
DT093 (8 m cable
length)
Range
-50 to 110 °C
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
Accuracy
±0.3 ˚C
±5 mV
±20 µA
Resolution
0.03 °C
1 mV (display)
1 µA (display)
4 mV (software)
4 µA (software)
18.2.
System Requirements
Software
Hardware
OS Platform: Windows XP SP3,
Windows Vista and Windows 7 (32 and
64-bit)
Screen Resolution: Minimum 1024 x
768
Processor: Pentium 4, 2.0 GHz or
better
Memory: 512 MB RAM
Storage Memory: 250 MB available
disk space for the DataSuite
application
268
Appendix E:
PicoLite Specifications
18.3.
General Specifications
PICOLITE-16K
Internal Temperature sensor range
-40 to 40 °C
Temperature accuracy
±0.5 °C
Memory capacity
16,000
Sampling rate
One per minute to once per 18 hours
LED
Bi-color red/green LED for sampling,
alarm, manual time stamp and
firmware update indication
Keypad
Push button for starting logging and
marking manual time stamps
PC Connection
Via direct USB interface
Power supply
Non-replaceable 3V CR2032 battery
Battery life
Six months, in normal ambient
conditions
Five-year shelf-life prior to initial use
Dimensions
74 mm x 30 mm x 13 mm
Weight
15 g
Standards Compliance
CE, EN12830
18.4.
System Requirements
Software
Hardware
OS Platform: Windows XP SP3,
Windows Vista and Windows 7 (32 and
64-bit)
Screen Resolution: Minimum 1024 x
768
Processor: Pentium 4, 2.0 GHz or
better
Memory: 512 MB RAM
Storage Memory: 250 MB available
disk space for the DataSuite
application
269
Appendix F:
DataNet Mounting Diagrams
This appendix includes mechanical diagrams of the DNL and DNR DataNet models.
The diagrams include dimensions to be used as a reference for mounting the units
on the wall.
Rear Casing Dimensions for DNL9XX and DNR9XX Wall Mounting
270
Cradle Dimensions for DNL8XX and DNR800 Wall Mounting
271
Appendix G:
Mini DataNet BXT Assembly
Instructions
Upgrade Kit Contents

Main plastic body (with key pad)

Circuit board compartment cover + 2 screws

Battery holder compartment cover + 1 screw

Battery holder with 2 wires + 4 x AA 3.6 V batteries

Sensor strain relief cover + 2 screws

2 screws and dibbles for logger wall mounting
To convert standard DNL8XX Mini DataNet units to the new DNL8XX-BXT featuring
the extended battery pack plastic casing, follow the instructions below.
Note: Only an authorized Fourtec distributor should perform the BXT conversion.
1. Remove the two screws located on the top panel of the standard Mini DataNet
logger (where the antenna is connected) and with care pull out the internal
compartment containing the logger circuit board and battery.
2. Remove the battery from the circuit board.
3. Take the main BXT plastic body from the BXT packaging and gently pull the red
and black wires out from the compartment which will house the Mini DataNet
circuit board.
4. Solder the wires to the circuit board: Black wire on the negative (-) battery
contact, Red wire on the positive (+) battery contact. See example below:
5. Insert the Mini DataNet circuit board into the main BXT plastic body, so that the
logger button will be facing the outside of the plastic casing.
272
6. Close the compartment housing the circuit board with the plastic panel, using the
two screws provided. Re-attach the Mini DataNet antenna to the screw terminal
which sticks out from the plastic panel.
7. Remove the black battery holder from the main BXT plastic body and insert the 4
x AA batteries provided.
8. Place the battery holder back into the BXT body and close the battery
compartment with the provided plastic cover. Secure the cover to the plastic body
using the screw provided.
9. The BXT logger is now ready for use. Please contact support@fourtec.com with
any problems.
273
Appendix H:
Safety Information and FCC IDs
Fourtec data logging systems comply with relevant safety regulations for data
processing devices. Please contact Fourtec with any questions regarding safety
issues during the data logging process.
Note: The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by
unauthorized modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Power Supply Safety Instructions
All Fourtec devices are supplied with either internal or external power supply. Internal
power supply refers to rechargeable or non-rechargeable battery packs. External
power supply refers to 12 VDC 100 to 240 AC adapters.
When replacing either the battery or AC adapter, ensure that the replacement is of
the same type and rating as the Fourtec-supplied item. Refer to the data logger
specifications for specific type and rating.
Please follow the safety instructions below when handling batteries and AC adapters.
Battery Safety
Danger of Explosion: The following data loggers use internal non-rechargeable
lithium batteries and therefore cannot be charged via an external power supply:
PicoLite, MicroLogPRO II, MicroLite, Mini DataNet.

Do not tamper or drop the battery to avoid leakage of hazardous chemicals
contained within.

Do not puncture, incinerate, disassemble or expose the battery to temperatures
above 122 ºF (50 ºC).

Keep the battery away from children.

Dispose of the battery only in accordance with local regulations concerning
potentially hazardous waste. Do not throw in the garbage bin.

Remove the battery when not using the data loggers for a significant period of
time e.g. when placed in long-term storage.
AC Power Adapter Safety

Use the AC adapter provided by Fourtec or another adapter of the same type and
rating as the original.

Verify that your power outlet is suitable for the voltage of the AC adapter.

If the AC adapter is connected to an AC outlet, make sure the area around the
outlet is accessible and the adapter is not covered while in operation.

Do not place the AC adapter on heat-sensitive material.
274

For data loggers powered by external power supply, do not charge the device
while situated in a carrying case or without sufficient airflow surrounding the
device.

Do not expose the adapter to direct sunlight or water.

Do not tamper with the adapter components.
FCC ID for DataNet System
DNR900:
FCC ID: XGO-DNR9XX
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
DNL920:
FCC ID: XGO-DNL9XX
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
DNL910-PA
FCC ID: XGO-DNL9XX-PA
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
DNL804:
FCC ID: XGO-DNL8XX
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
DNL910:
FCC ID: XGO-DNL9XX
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
DNR800:
FCC ID: XGO-DNR8XX
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
DNL920-PA
FCC ID: XGO-DNL9XX-PA
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
DNL808:
FCC ID: XGO-DNL8XX
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
275
DNL810:
FCC ID: XGO-DNL8XX
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
276
Appendix I:
Ordering Information
For the full list of Fourtec products, sensors and accessories, and to place Fourtec
orders please visit http://www.fourtec.com or contact your local Fourtec distributor.
Product Suite (Data Loggers only)
Part Number
Product Name
Product Description
DNR900
DataNet
Receiver/Repeater
Two-mode module for creating
and managing DataNet ZigBee
network, and extending network
transmission range
DNL910A
DataNet Temp. Data
Logger
 Internal Temperature PT-100
sensor

Four channels: mA, V, mV,
TC-K/J/T, PT-100, Pulse,
Frequency, Contact
DNL920A
DataNet Temp/RH Data
Logger
 Internal Digital RH and
Temperature sensors
 Four channels: mA, V, mV,
TC-K/J/T, PT-100, Pulse,
Frequency, Contact
DNL920A-PA
DataNet Temp/RH Data
Logger with Power
Amplifier
 Internal Digital RH and
Temperature sensors
Mini DataNet Temp/RH
Logger
 Internal Digital Temperature
and Humidity sensors
DNL810A-BXT
 Four channels: mA, V, mV,
TC-K/J/T, PT-100, Pulse,
Frequency, Contact
 Includes Power Amplifier for
long-range transmission

DNL808A-BXT
Mini DataNet External
Temp. Logger
 External NTC 10 KΩ
Temperature input with NTC
probe

277
External battery pack
supporting 4 x AA 3.6 V
battery, 3-year life
External battery pack
supporting 4 x AA 3.6 V
battery, 3-year life
Part Number
DBSA710A
Product Name
DaqLink Data Logger
Product Description
 Internal Temperature PT-100
sensor

Four channels: mA, V, mV,
TC-K/J/T, PT-100, Pulse,
Frequency, Contact
DBSA720A
DaqLink Data Logger
 Internal Digital RH and
Temperature sensors
 Four channels: mA, V, mV,
TC-K/J/T, PT-100, Pulse,
Frequency, Contact
LITE5008P-A
MicroLite II USB Temp
Logger
 Internal NTC Temp sensor
MicroLite II USB Temp
Logger
 Internal NTC Temp sensor
MicroLite II USB
Temp/RH Logger
 Internal Digital Temp/RH
sensor
LITE5032P-A
LITE5032P-RH-A
 8k sample memory
 32k sample memory
 32K sample memory
LITE5032P-EXT-A
LITE5032P-V-A
LITE5032P-4/20-A
EC800A
EC850A
MicroLite II USB External
Temp Logger
 External NTC Temp input
MicroLite II USB Voltage
Logger
 External 0-10 V input
MicroLite II USB Current
Logger
 External 4-20 mA input
MicroLogPRO II Temp
Data Logger
 Internal NTC Temp sensor
MicroLogPRO II Temp
Data Logger
 Internal Digital RH and Temp
sensor
 32K sample memory
 32K sample memory
 32K sample memory


278
External sensor input
External sensor input
Part Number
PICOLITE-16K
Product Name
PicoLite USB Temp
Logger
279
Product Description
 Internal Temp sensor
 16K sample memory
Download PDF